Chevrolet 2013 Spark Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Chevrolet Chevrolet-2013-Chevrolet-Spark-Owners-Manual-814065 chevrolet-2013-chevrolet-spark-owners-manual-814065 chevrolet pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 356

DownloadChevrolet Chevrolet-2013-Chevrolet-Spark-Owners-Manual- Owner's Manual  Chevrolet-2013-chevrolet-spark-owners-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (1,1)

2013 Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Keys, Doors, and
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 4-1
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-25
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Downloadable Applications . . . 7-29
Bluetooth Phone/Devices . . . . . 7-34

Trademarks and License
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-13
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-22
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-27
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-37

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (2,1)

2013 Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2
Special Application
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
OnStar Additional
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (3,1)

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems,
slogans, vehicle model names, and
vehicle body designs appearing in
this manual including, but not limited
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and
SPARK are trademarks and/or
service marks of General Motors
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,
or licensors.
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase or
due to changes subsequent to the
printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase
documentation relating to your
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 20944900 A First Printing

specific vehicle to confirm each of
the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for
Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
suivante:
Helm, Incorporated
Attention: Customer Service
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, MI 48170

©

iii

Using this Manual
To quickly locate information about
the vehicle, use the Index in the
back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.

Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a
hazard that could result in injury or
death.

2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

iv

Black plate (4,1)

Introduction

{ WARNING
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other
people.
Notice: This means there is
something that could result in
property or vehicle damage. This
would not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty.

Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart

The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.

Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to
the Index.

M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
*:

This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
A circle with a slash through it is a
safety symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”

9 : Airbag Readiness Light
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
5 /g : Audio Steering Wheel
Controls or OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer

j : LATCH System Child
Restraints

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (5,1)

Introduction

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
O : Power
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
g : StabiliTrak® Off
i : Traction Control Off
M : Windshield Washer Fluid

v

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

vi

Black plate (6,1)

Introduction

2 NOTES

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (1,1)

In Brief

In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive Information
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-7
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-8
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 1-9
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-10
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Vehicle Features
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-12

Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . .
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-12
1-12
1-13
1-13
1-14

Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-15
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-15
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

1-1

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

1-2

In Brief

Instrument Panel

Black plate (2,1)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (3,1)

In Brief
1. Air Vents on page 8‑3.
2. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1.
3. Horn on page 5‑2.
4. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑7.
5. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3.
6. Infotainment on page 7‑1.
7. Information Display.
8. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6‑3.
9. Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑4.
10. Hood Release. See Hood on
page 10‑4.
11. Data Link Connector (DLC)
(Out of View). See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑11.
12. Cruise Control on page 9‑30 (If
Equipped).
13. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 5‑2.

14. Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑2 (If Equipped).
15. Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑5 (If Equipped).
16. Shift Lever. See Automatic
Transmission on page 9‑22 (If
Equipped) or Manual
Transmission on page 9‑24 (If
Equipped).
17. USB Port. See Auxiliary
Devices on page 7‑16.

1-3

Initial Drive
Information
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the
important features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual.

18. Climate Control Systems on
page 8‑1.

Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System

19. Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑27/StabiliTrak®
System on page 9‑29.

For vehicles with the RKE
transmitter, it may work up to 60 m
(195 ft) away from the vehicle.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

1-4

Black plate (4,1)

In Brief
Press and hold 7 for at least
three seconds to sound the panic
alarm.
Press 7 again to cancel the panic
alarm.
See Keys on page 2‑1 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.

Door Locks
Press the key release button to
extend the key blade. The key can
be used for the ignition and all
locks.
Press K to unlock the driver door or
all doors and the lifgate.
Press Q to lock all doors and the
liftgate.
Lock and unlock feedback can be
personalized. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑25.
Press and release
vehicle locator.

7 to initiate

To lock or unlock the doors from
outside the vehicle:
.

.

Use the key in the driver door to
lock and unlock the door.
Press Q or K on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
if equipped, to lock and unlock
the doors. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 2‑3.

To lock or unlock the doors from
inside the vehicle:

Q or K, if equipped.

.

Press

.

Use the lock knob on the top of
the door panel.

See Door Locks on page 2‑4 and
Central Locking System on
page 2‑5.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (5,1)

In Brief

1-5

Liftgate
To lock or unlock the liftgate from
the outside, use the key in the
liftgate lock or press Q or K on the
RKE transmitter, if equipped. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.

With RKE
To lock or unlock the liftgate from
the inside, press Q or K.

To open the liftgate, pull the handle
and lift up.
When closing the liftgate, use the
pull cup.
See Liftgate on page 2‑7 or Central
Locking System on page 2‑5.

Without RKE

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

1-6

Black plate (6,1)

In Brief

Windows

Seat Adjustment

Seat Height Adjuster

Manual Seats

Press the switch down to open the
window. Pull the front of the switch
up to close it.
The switches work when the vehicle
is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,
or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑17 and Power
Windows on page 2‑12.

To adjust the seat:
1. Lift the bar under the front edge
of the seat cushion to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.

If available, turn the knob to raise or
lower the seat.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (7,1)

In Brief
Reclining Seatbacks

To return the seatback to the upright
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.

1-7

while keeping the seat and the head
restraint height in the proper
position.
See Head Restraints on page 3‑2
and Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.

Safety Belts

See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑4.

Second Row Seats
To recline the seatback:

The rear seatbacks can be folded
down to increase cargo space.

1. Lift the lever.

See Rear Seats on page 3‑6.

2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.

Head Restraint
Adjustment

3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked in place.

Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.

Refer to the following sections for
important information on how to use
safety belts properly.

To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary

.

Safety Belts on page 3‑9.

.

How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly on page 3‑10.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

1-8

Black plate (8,1)

In Brief

.

Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑11.

.

Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑37.

Passenger Sensing
System

passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑24 for important information.

If equipped, move the control up,
down, or side to side to adjust the
mirror.

The passenger airbag status
indicator will be visible on the center
display when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑10.

See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑10.
Power Outside Mirrors

Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
Manual Outside Mirrors
United States

Canada
The passenger sensing system
turns off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag and knee
airbag under certain conditions. No
other airbag is affected by the

1. If equipped, move the selector
switch to L (Left) or R (Right) to
choose the driver or passenger
mirror.
2. Move the control up, down,
or side to side to adjust the
mirror.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (9,1)

In Brief

1-9

Steering Wheel
Adjustment

Interior Lighting

Adjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

Hold the rearview mirror in the
center and move it to view the area
behind the vehicle.

1. Pull the lever down.

The dome lamp controls are in the
overhead console.

2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.

Move the control to change the
lamp setting.

3. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.

OFF : Turns the lamps off, even
when a door is open.

Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.

DOOR : Turns the lamps on
automatically when a door is
opened.

3. Return the selector switch to the
center with done.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑11.

Dome Lamps

Folding Mirrors
The vehicle has manual folding
mirrors. These mirrors can be folded
inward to prevent damage when
going through an automatic car
wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward
the vehicle. Push the mirror outward
to return it to the original position.
See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑11.

Interior Mirror

Manual Rearview Mirror
Push the tab forward for daytime
use and pull it for nighttime use to
avoid glare from the headlamps
from behind.

ON : Turns on the dome lamps.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

1-10

Black plate (10,1)

In Brief

For more information about interior
lighting, see Instrument Panel
Illumination Control on page 6‑4 or
Courtesy Lamps on page 6‑4.

; : Turns on the parking lamps,
together with the taillamps, license
plate lamp, and instrument panel
lights.

Exterior Lighting

OFF: Turns all the lamps off,
except the Daytime Running
Lamps♦(DRL).
The DRL automatically turn off when
the ignition key is turned off.
See Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1 and Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) on page 6‑2.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

3 : Turns on the headlamps,
together with the following:
Taillamps
License Plate Lamp

.

Instrument Panel Lights

.

Parking Lamps

LO: Use for slow wipes.
INT: Move the lever up to INT for
intermittent wipes, then turn the x
INT band up for more frequent
wipes or down for less frequent
wipes.
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, briefly move
the wiper lever down. For several
wipes, hold the wiper lever down.
Pull the windshield wiper lever
toward you to spray windshield
washer fluid and activate the wipers.

There are three positions:

.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

Windshield Washer

The exterior lamp control is on the
turn signal lever on the left side of
the steering column.

.

Move the lever to one of the
following positions:

The windshield wiper/washer lever
is on the right side of the steering
column.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3. For vehicles with a rear
window wiper/washer, see Rear
Window Wiper/Washer on page 5‑3.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (11,1)

In Brief

Climate Controls
The heating, cooling, and ventilation
for the vehicle can be controlled
with this system.

Vehicle Features
Radio(s)
O VOL: Press to turn the system
on and off. Turn to increase or
decrease the volume.
RADIO BAND: Press to select AM
or FM.

© or¨ (Seek):

See Clock on page 5‑4.

Vehicles with a SiriusXM® satellite
radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM
satellite radio subscription can
receive SiriusXM programming.

3. Recirculation

Storing a Favorite Station

4. Temperature Control

Stations from all bands can be
stored in the favorite lists in any
order. Up to six stations can be
stored in each favorite page and the
number of available favorite pages
can be set.

See Climate Control Systems on
page 8‑1.

Setting the Clock

Buttons 1−6: Press to save and
select favorite stations.

2. Air Conditioning

6. Air Delivery Mode Control

For more information, see “Storing a
Station as a Favorite” in AM-FM
Radio on page 7‑8.

Satellite Radio

For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Operation on page 7‑5.

5. Rear Window Defogger

To store the station to a position in
the list, press the corresponding
button 1−6 until a beep is heard.

Press to seek the
previous or next station.

INFO: Press to view current radio
information.
1. Fan Control

1-11

SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Service
SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
based in the 48 contiguous United
States and 10 Canadian provinces.
SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
variety of programming and
commercial-free music, coast to
coast, and in digital-quality sound.
A fee is required to receive the
SiriusXM service.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

1-12

Black plate (12,1)

In Brief

Refer to:
.

www.siriusxm.com or call
1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).

.

www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

See Satellite Radio on page 7‑12.

Portable Audio Devices
Some vehicles may have a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) auxiliary input on the front of
the radio on the right side. There
may also be a auxiliary input and a
USB port in the center stack.
External devices such as iPods®,
laptop computers, MP3 players, CD
changers, and USB drives may be
connected, depending on the audio
system.
See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑16.

Bluetooth®

Steering Wheel Controls

The Bluetooth® system allows
users with a Bluetooth-enabled cell
phone to make and receive
hands-free calls using the vehicle
audio system and controls.
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
must be paired with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system before it can be
used in the vehicle. Not all phones
will support all functions.
See Bluetooth (Overview) on
page 7‑20 or Bluetooth
(Infotainment Controls) on
page 7‑21.

For vehicles with audio steering
wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.

¦ or ¥ SEEK:

Press to go to the
next or previous radio station, song
on an iPod® or file on a USB device
(if equipped).

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (13,1)

In Brief

5 / g : For vehicles with a
Bluetooth or OnStar, press to
interact with those systems. See
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑20
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
on page 7‑21 or OnStar Overview
on page 14‑1.

Cruise Control

See Cruise Control on page 9‑30.

Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The DIC has different displays,
which can be accessed by using the
DIC buttons on the right side of the
instrument cluster. The DIC displays
trip, fuel, and warning messages if a
system problem is detected.

> / c : Press to silence the
vehicle speakers only. Press again
to turn the sound on. For vehicles
with OnStar or Bluetooth systems,
press to reject an incoming call,
or end a current call.
+ or − x : Press + or − to increase
or decrease the volume.

1-13

DIC Buttons

I:

Press to turn the cruise
control system on and off.
RES/−: Press briefly to make the
vehicle resume to a previously set
speed, or press and hold to
accelerate.
SET/−: Press to set the speed and
activate cruise control or make the
vehicle decelerate.

[ : Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set
speed from memory.

MENU: Press to display the DIC
menus.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

1-14

Black plate (14,1)

In Brief

w or x : Use to scroll through the
menus.
SET/CLR: Press to set or clear the
menu item displayed.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑21.

Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

Performance and
Maintenance
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The TCS limits wheel spin. The
system is on when the vehicle is
started.
.

The vehicle has an accessory
power outlet located in front of the
cupholders on the centerstack.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

.

To turn off traction control, press
and release the TCS/StabiliTrak
button g on the center stack. i
illuminates in the instrument
cluster.
Press and release the TCS/
StabiliTrak button g again to
turn traction control back on. i
goes off in the instrument
cluster.

See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑27.

StabiliTrak® System
The StabiliTrak system assists with
directional control of the vehicle in
difficult driving conditions. The
system is on when the vehicle is
started.
.

To turn off both traction control
and StabiliTrak, press and hold
the TCS/StabiliTrak button g on
the center stack, until i and g
illuminate in the instrument
cluster.

.

Press the TCS/StabiliTrak
button g again to turn on both
systems. i and g go off in
instrument cluster.

See StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑29.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (15,1)

In Brief

Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).

tire pressures are getting low and
the tires need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
The TPMS does not replace normal
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain
the correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10‑42.

The low tire pressure warning light
alerts to a significant loss in
pressure of one of the vehicle's
tires. If the warning light comes on,
stop as soon as possible and inflate
the tires to the recommended
pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑9.
The warning light will remain on until
the tire pressure is corrected.
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
may be an early indicator that the

Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
This vehicle may have a tire sealant
and compressor kit that can be used
to seal small punctures in the tread
area of the tire. Significant sidewall
damage will require the tire to be
replaced.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit on page 10‑54 for complete
operating information.

1-15

Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates
engine oil life based on vehicle use
and displays a DIC message when
it is necessary to change the engine
oil and filter. The oil life system
should be reset to 100% only
following an oil change.
Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Display Remaining Oil Life on
the DIC.
2. Press and hold the SET/CLR
button on the DIC for more than
five seconds. The oil life will
change to 100%.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑9.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

1-16

Black plate (16,1)

In Brief

Driving for Better Fuel
Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips
to get the best fuel economy
possible.

.

Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.

.

Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.

.

Avoid fast starts and accelerate
smoothly.

Roadside Assistance
Program

.

Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops.

U.S.: 1-800-243-8872

.

Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.

.

When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control.

.

Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.

.

Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.

.

Combine several trips into a
single trip.

TTY Users (U.S. Only):
1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new Chevrolet,
you are automatically enrolled in the
Roadside Assistance program.
See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 13‑5.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
If the vehicle has an active OnStar
subscription, contact OnStar and the
vehicle’s current GPS location will
be sent to an OnStar advisor to

assess the situation, contact
Roadside Assistance, and relay the
exact location to send help.

OnStar®
If equipped, this vehicle has a
comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live Advisor
for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
Connection, and Diagnostic
Services. See OnStar Overview on
page 14‑1.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (1,1)

Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and
Windows

Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Keys and Locks
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . .
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central Locking System . . . . . . .
Door Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . .
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-6

Doors
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . .
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . .

2-8
2-8
2-9
2-9

Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-11

Windows
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

2-1

Keys and Locks
Keys

{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous and
children or others could be
seriously injured or killed. They
could operate the power windows
or other controls or make the
vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the
ignition, and children or others
could be caught in the path of a
closing window. Do not leave
children in a vehicle with the
ignition key.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

2-2

Black plate (2,1)

Keys, Doors, and Windows
The key that is part of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can
be used for the ignition and all
locks.
Press the key release button on the
RKE transmitter to extend the key.
Press the button and the key blade
to retract the key.
See your dealer if a new key is
needed.
Base Level Key

If it becomes difficult to turn the key,
inspect the key blade for debris.
Periodically clean with a brush
or pick.
If you are locked out of the vehicle,
see Roadside Assistance Program
on page 13‑5.
With an active OnStar subscription,
an OnStar Advisor may remotely
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar
Overview on page 14‑1.

Uplevel Key

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (3,1)

Keys, Doors, and Windows

Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System

Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation

See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑15 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

The RKE transmitter may work up to
60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.
Other conditions can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System on page 2‑3.

2-3

The following buttons are on the
transmitter:

Q (Lock):

Press once to lock all
doors and the liftgate. The turn
signal indicators may flash and/or
the horn may sound to indicate
locking.

.

Check the distance. The
transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle.

If any door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors and the liftgate
will lock, if Unlocked Door Anti Lock
Out is disabled through vehicle
personalization. If Unlocked Door
Anti Lock Out is enabled, only the
driver door unlocks.

.

Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.

See “Remote Door Unlock” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑25.

.

Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.

.

If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician
for service.

Pressing Q may also arm the
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
Alarm System on page 2‑8.

If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:

K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
driver door. Press again to unlock all
doors and the liftgate. The turn
signal indicators flash to indicate
unlocking has occurred.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

2-4

Black plate (4,1)

Keys, Doors, and Windows

See “Remote Door Unlock” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑25.
Pressing K may also disarm the
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
Alarm System on page 2‑8.

7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic

remaining transmitters must also be
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters will no longer work
once the new transmitter is
programmed. See your dealer to
have new transmitters programmed.

Battery Replacement

Alarm): Press and release one
time to initiate vehicle locator. The
exterior lamps flash and the horn
chirps three times. Press and hold
7 for at least three seconds to
sound the panic alarm. The horn
sounds and the turn signals flash for
30 second or until 7 is pressed
again, or the key is placed in the
ignition and turned to ON/RUN.

The battery is not rechargeable. To
replace the battery:

Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle

4. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing up. Push the battery
down until it is held in place.
Replace with a CR2032 or
equivalent battery.

Only RKE transmitters programmed
to this vehicle will work. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer.
When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to this vehicle, all

Door Locks

{ WARNING
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
.

Passengers, especially
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So, all
passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
driven.

.

Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
(Continued)

1. Push the button on the
transmitter to extend the key.
2. Remove the battery cover by
prying it with a finger.
3. Remove the battery by pushing
on the battery and sliding it
toward the key blade.

5. Snap the battery cover back on
to the transmitter.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (5,1)

Keys, Doors, and Windows

Door Ajar Reminder

WARNING (CONTINUED)

If one of the doors or the liftgate is
not closed properly while the ignition
is on, the door ajar light on the
instrument cluster comes on and
stays on until the doors are closed.
See Door Ajar Light on page 5‑21.

injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
.

Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
the vehicle. Locking the doors
can help prevent this from
happening.

To lock or unlock the doors from
outside the vehicle:
.

.

Use the key in the driver door to
lock and unlock the door.
Press Q or K on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
if equipped, to lock and unlock
the doors. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 2‑3.

2-5

Automatic Door Locks
To lock or unlock the doors from
inside the vehicle:

Q or K, if equipped.

.

Press

.

Use the lock knob on the top of
the door panel.

If equipped, the vehicle is
programmed so that when the doors
are closed, the ignition is on, and
the shift lever is moved out of
P (Park) for automatic
transmissions, or the vehicle speed
is above 13 km/h (8 mph) for manual
transmissions, the doors and the
liftgate will lock.

Central Locking System

To unlock the doors and the liftgate:

This system allows the doors and
liftgate to be locked and unlocked
by using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or by using the
key in the driver door.

.

Press

.

For vehicles with an automatic
transmission, shift the
transmission into P (Park).

See Door Locks on page 2‑4 and
Liftgate on page 2‑7.

K on the door.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

2-6
.

Black plate (6,1)

Keys, Doors, and Windows

For vehicle with a manual
transmission, remove the key
from the ignition.

Safety Locks

Using the Rear Door
Safety Lock

Canceling a Rear Door
Safety Lock

1. Move the lever up to lock.

1. Unlock the door from the inside
and open the door from the
outside.

2. Close the door.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the
other rear door lock.
Notice: Pulling the inside door
handle while the rear door safety
locks are engaged could damage
your vehicle. Do not pull the
inside door handle while the rear
door safety locks are engaged.
The rear doors on the vehicle
cannot be opened from the inside
while this feature is in use.

The vehicle has rear door safety
locks on each rear door that prevent
passengers from opening the rear
doors from the inside.

Opening a Rear Door When the
Safety Lock is On
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2. Open the door from the outside.
For the rear doors to open from the
inside, the safety locks have to be
moved back to the unlock position.

2. Move the lever down to unlock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the
other rear door lock.
The rear door locks can now be
locked and unlocked normally.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (7,1)

Keys, Doors, and Windows

Doors

WARNING (CONTINUED)

Liftgate

.

{ WARNING
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:
.

Close all of the windows.

.

Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)

.

Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See “Climate
Control Systems” in the
Index.
If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.

For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑21.

2-7

Notice: To avoid damage to the
liftgate or liftgate glass, make
sure the area above and behind
the liftgate is clear before
opening it.
To lock or unlock the liftgate from
the outside, use the key in the
liftgate lock or press Q or K on the
RKE transmitter, if equipped. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

2-8

Black plate (8,1)

Keys, Doors, and Windows
To lock or unlock the liftgate from
the inside, press Q or K.

Vehicle Security
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features; however, they do not make
the vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm System
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
system.

Without RKE

To open the liftgate, pull the handle
and lift up.
When closing the liftgate, use the
pull cup.
See Central Locking System on
page 2‑5.

With RKE

The indicator light on the center
stack, indicates the status of the
system.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (9,1)

Keys, Doors, and Windows
Arming the System
1. Press Q once on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE). The
anti-theft alarm system is active
automatically after 30 seconds.
2. Press Q twice and the anti-theft
alarm system is immediately
active.
The security indicator will flash to
indicate the anti-theft system is
working. It goes out when the doors
are unlocked using the RKE
transmitter. The indicator comes on
when the doors are locked using the
RKE transmitter.

Disarming the System
To disarm the system, either unlock
the doors using the RKE transmitter,
or start the vehicle .
To avoid setting off the alarm by
accident:
Lock the vehicle with the transmitter
after all occupants have left the
vehicle and all doors are closed.

If you set off the alarm by accident,
turn off the alarm by pressing Q or
K on the RKE transmitter or start
the vehicle with a recognized
transmitter in the vehicle. The alarm
will stop after 30 seconds and reset
to the activated anti-theft mode.
If the system does not operate as
described above, have it checked
by your dealer.

Immobilizer

2-9

The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the key is
removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically
disarmed when the vehicle is
started with the correct key. The key
uses a transponder that matches an
immobilizer control unit in the
vehicle and automatically disarms
the system. Only an authorized key
starts the vehicle. The vehicle may
not start if the key is damaged.

See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑15 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer Operation
This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.

The security light, in the instrument
cluster, comes on if there is a
problem with arming or disarming
the theft-deterrent system.
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

2-10

Black plate (10,1)

Keys, Doors, and Windows

If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on, there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and
the key appears to be undamaged
or the light continues to stay on, try
another ignition key. If the engine
does not start with the other key, the
vehicle needs service. If the vehicle
does start, the first key may be
damaged. See your dealer who can
service the theft-deterrent system
and have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Manual Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.

If equipped, move the control up,
down, or side to side to adjust the
mirror.
Adjust the mirrors so the side and
the area behind the vehicle can
be seen.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (11,1)

Keys, Doors, and Windows

Power Mirrors

Folding Mirrors
Manual Folding Mirrors
The vehicle has manual folding
mirrors. These mirrors can be folded
inward to prevent damage when
going through an automatic car
wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward
the vehicle. Push the mirror outward
to return it to the original position.

1. If equipped, move the selector
switch to L (Left) or R (Right) to
choose the driver or passenger
mirror.
2. Move the control up, down,
or side to side to adjust the
mirror. Adjust the mirrors so the
side and the area behind the
vehicle can be seen.
3. Return the selector switch to the
center when done.

2-11

Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
To adjust the inside rearview mirror,
hold the rearview mirror in the
center and move it to view the area
behind the vehicle.
Push the tab forward for daytime
use and pull it for nighttime use to
avoid glare from the headlamps
from behind.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

2-12

Black plate (12,1)

Keys, Doors, and Windows

Windows

{ WARNING
Never leave a child, a helpless
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics are
designed to improve fuel economy
performance. This may result in a
pulsing sound when either rear
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the
sound, open a front window.

Power Windows

{ WARNING
Children could be seriously
injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Never
leave keys in a vehicle with
children. When there are children
in the rear seat, use the window
lockout button to prevent
operation of the windows. See
Keys on page 2‑1.

The switches on the driver door
control all windows. In addition,
each passenger door has a switch
for its own window.
Press the switch down to open the
window. Pull the front of the switch
up to close it.
The power windows only operate
with the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑17.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (13,1)

Keys, Doors, and Windows
Window Lockout

Sun Visors
Pull the sun visor down to block out
glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount and swing it to
the side.

Visor Vanity Mirror
The vehicle may have vanity mirrors
and card holders on the back of the
sun visors. Swing down the sun
visor to expose the vanity mirror.

This feature prevents the rear
passenger windows from operating,
except from the driver position.
.

Press v to activate the window
lockout.

.

Press v again to deactivate the
window lockout.

2-13

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

2-14

Black plate (14,1)

Keys, Doors, and Windows

2 NOTES

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (1,1)

Seats and Restraints

Seats and
Restraints

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .
Safety System Check . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . .

Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front Seats
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . .
Front Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3
3-4
3-5
3-5

Rear Seats
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Safety Belts
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

3-16
3-16
3-16
3-17

Airbag System
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-19
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
What Will You See after an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

3-1

Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-28
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-29
Replacing Airbag System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Restraint Systems . . . . .
Where to Put the Restraint . . .
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . .
Securing Child Restraints
(Right Front
Passenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-30
3-32
3-34
3-36
3-37
3-44
3-45
3-48

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-2

Black plate (2,1)

Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints

{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.

Front Seats
The front seats have adjustable
head restraints in the outboard
seating positions.

Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the
chances of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint can
be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head
restraint to make sure that it is
locked in place.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not designed to be
removed.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (3,1)

Seats and Restraints
Rear Seats
The vehicle's rear seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.

To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
If you are installing a child restraint
in the rear seat, see “Securing a
Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System” under Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑37.

The height of the head restraint can
be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head
restraint to make sure that it is
locked in place.

3-3

Front Seats
Seat Adjustment
Manual Seats

{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
seat while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-4

Black plate (4,1)

Seats and Restraints

To adjust the seat:
1. Lift the bar under the front edge
of the seat cushion to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
place.

Seat Height Adjuster

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.

2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked in place.
To return the seatback to the upright
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.

{ WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
(Continued)
If available, turn the knob to raise or
lower the seat.

To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the lever.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (5,1)

Seats and Restraints

3-5

Front Seat Armrest

WARNING (CONTINUED)
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries.
The lap belt could go up over
your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is moving.
There is an armrest on the inboard
side of the driver seat. To raise or
lower the armrest, push up or pull
down on the armrest.

Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns. To
(Continued)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-6

Black plate (6,1)

Seats and Restraints

Rear Seats

WARNING (CONTINUED)
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
cover, or similar item. This may
cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may
damage the seat.

Folding the Seatback
Either side of the seatback can be
folded down for more cargo space.
Fold a seatback only when the
vehicle is not moving.

If available, the buttons are below
the climate control system. To
operate, the engine must be
running.
Press L or M to heat the driver or
passenger seat. The indicator light
on the control turns on when this
feature is on. Press the control
again to turn this feature off.
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
To fold a seatback down:
1. Remove the rear head restraints.
See “Head Restraint Removal
and Reinstallation” under Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑37.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (7,1)

Seats and Restraints
2. Slide the front seats forward and
place the front seatbacks in the
upright position. See Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑3 and
Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑4.

3-7

5. Fold the seatback forward
and down.
6. Repeat Steps 1–5 for the other
seatback and seat cushion,
if desired.

Raising the Seatback

{ WARNING
4. Pull up the release knob on the
top of the seatback.

3. Pull up on the front edge of the
rear seat cushion to release it.
Tilt the seat cushion forward
toward the front of the vehicle.

If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.

{ WARNING
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
(Continued)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-8

Black plate (8,1)

Seats and Restraints

WARNING (CONTINUED)

To return the rear seats to the
normal seating position:

seriously injured. After raising the
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.

3. Push the seatback rearward all
the way to lock it in place.
4. Push and pull the top of the
seatback to be sure it is locked
into position.
5. Return the seat cushion to its
original position and push down
on the front part of the seat
cushion until it latches.

{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.

Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑37.

6. Remove the safety belt from the
hole on the side trim.
1. Insert the safety belt latch plate
into the hole on the side trim
before raising the seatback.
The safety belt should not cross
the seatback locking mechanism
when raising the seatback.
2. Lift the seatback up slightly and
reinstall the head restraint. See
“Head Restraint Removal and
Reinstallation” under Lower

7. Repeat Steps 1–6 for the other
seatback and seat cushion,
if necessary.
If added cargo space is not needed,
the seatbacks should be kept in the
upright, locked position.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (9,1)

Seats and Restraints

Safety Belts
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING
Do not let anyone ride where a
safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, injuries can be much
worse than if you are wearing
safety belts. You can be seriously
injured or killed by hitting things
inside the vehicle harder or by
being ejected from the vehicle. In
addition, anyone who is not
buckled up can strike other
passengers in the vehicle.
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

3-9

Why Safety Belts Work

are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow
passengers to ride in any area of
the vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts.
Always wear a safety belt, and
check that all passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5‑9.

When riding in a vehicle, you travel
as fast as the vehicle does. If the
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep
going until something stops you.
It could be the windshield, the
instrument panel, or the safety belts!
When you wear a safety belt, you
and the vehicle slow down together.
There is more time to stop because
you stop over a longer distance and,
when worn properly, your strongest
bones take the forces from the

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-10

Black plate (10,1)

Seats and Restraints

safety belts. That is why wearing
safety belts makes such good
sense.

Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not.
Your chance of being conscious
during and after a crash, so you
can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection.

Also, in nearly all states and in
all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
There are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And
there are different rules for smaller
children and infants. If a child will be
riding in the vehicle, see Older
Children on page 3‑30 or Infants
and Young Children on page 3‑32.
Follow those rules for everyone's
protection.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
There are important things to know
about wearing a safety belt properly.

.

Sit up straight and always keep
your feet on the floor in front
of you.

.

Always use the correct buckle
for your seating position.

.

Wear the lap part of the belt low
and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong
pelvic bones and you would be
less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (11,1)

Seats and Restraints
.

Wear the shoulder belt over the
shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining
forces. The shoulder belt locks if
there is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured,
or even killed, by not wearing
your safety belt properly.
.

Never allow the lap or
shoulder belt to become
loose or twisted.

.

Never wear the shoulder belt
under both arms or behind
your back.

.

Never route the lap or
shoulder belt over an
armrest.

Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.

3-11

2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-12

Black plate (12,1)

Seats and Restraints
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
in this section for instructions on
use and important safety
information.

3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.

To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.

If the latch plate will not go fully
into the buckle, check if the
correct buckle is being used.
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 3‑16.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.

Before a door is closed, be sure the
belt is out of the way. If a door is
slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (13,1)

Seats and Restraints
Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 3‑10.

To move it down, press the release
button and move the height adjuster
to the desired position.

After the adjuster is set to the
desired position, try to move it down
without pressing the release button
to make sure it has locked into
position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle may have safety belt
pretensioners for front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal, near
frontal, side, or rear crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner
activation are met.
Pretensioners, if equipped, work
only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, the
pretensioners and probably other
new parts of the vehicle's safety belt
system will need to be replaced.
See Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash on page 3‑17.

3-13

Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
Rear safety belt comfort guides may
provide added safety belt comfort
for older children who have
outgrown booster seats and for
some adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide
positions the shoulder belt away
from the neck and head.
Safety belt comfort guides are
available through your dealer.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-14

Black plate (14,1)

Seats and Restraints

To install the adjustable comfort
guide to the seatback and the
safety belt:

3. Place the guide over the belt,
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Locate the anchor loop on the
rear outboard seatback, near
the top.
2. Attach the adjustable comfort
guide to the anchor loop by
threading the hook through
the loop.

4. Be sure that the belt is not
twisted and it lies flat. The
elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
5. The elastic cord on the comfort
guide is adjustable. You can
make it longer or shorter by
squeezing both ends of the
plastic adjuster and pulling on
the elastic cord or the guide.
6. Adjust the guide so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the
shoulder and not falling off of it.
The belt should be close to, but
not contacting, the neck.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (15,1)

Seats and Restraints

Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy

Improper comfort guide
adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in
a crash.

Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.

{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.

3-15

7. Buckle and position the safety
belt as described previously in
this section. Make sure that the
shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide.
Un-hook the guide from the loop on
the seat. Store the guide in a
convenient place like the glove box
for the next time it is needed.

A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-16

Black plate (16,1)

Seats and Restraints

The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.

Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats. To
wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.

Safety System Check

Safety Belt Care

Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.

Keep belts clean and dry.

Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 5‑9.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑16.

{ WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (17,1)

Seats and Restraints

Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts after a
Crash

{ WARNING
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.

See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Have the safety belt pretensioners,
if equipped, checked if the vehicle
has been in a crash, or if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 5‑9.

3-17

Airbag System
The vehicle has the following
airbags:
.

A frontal airbag for the driver.

.

A frontal airbag for the front
outboard passenger.

.

A knee airbag for the driver.

.

A knee airbag for the front
outboard passenger.

.

A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.

.

A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the front outboard
passenger.

.

Seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the second row
outboard passengers.

.

A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-18
.

Black plate (18,1)

Seats and Restraints

A roof-rail airbag for the front
outboard passenger and the
passenger seated directly
behind the front outboard
passenger.

All vehicle airbags have the word
AIRBAG on the trim or on a label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG is on the center of the
steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the front
outboard passenger.
For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG
is on the lower part of the
instrument panel.
For seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the
side of the seatback closest to
the door.
For roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce

the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:

WARNING (CONTINUED)
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly, whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.

{ WARNING
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt, even
with airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to inflate
in every crash. In some crashes
safety belts are the only restraint.
See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 3‑21.
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce the chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or
being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the
safety belts. Everyone in the
(Continued)

{ WARNING
Because airbags inflate with great
force and faster than the blink of
an eye, anyone who is up
against, or very close to any
airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not
sit unnecessarily close to any
airbag, as you would be if sitting
on the edge of the seat or leaning
forward. Safety belts help keep
you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear a safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
(Continued)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (19,1)

Seats and Restraints
WARNING (CONTINUED)
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.

WARNING (CONTINUED)

3-19

Where Are the Airbags?

vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 3‑30 or Infants
and Young Children on
page 3‑32.

{ WARNING
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle's safety belt
system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in the
(Continued)

There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag electrical
system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑9.

The driver frontal airbag is in the
center of the steering wheel.
The front outboard passenger
frontal airbag is in the passenger
side instrument panel.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-20

Black plate (20,1)

Seats and Restraints

The driver knee airbag is below the
steering column. The front outboard
passenger knee airbag is below the
glove box.

Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Side Similar

Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,
Passenger Side Similar

The seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and front
outboard passenger are in the side
of the seatbacks closest to the door.

The second row seat-mounted side
impact airbags are in the sides of
the rear seatback closest to
the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, and second
row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.

{ WARNING
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
(Continued)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (21,1)

Seats and Restraints
WARNING (CONTINUED)
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that
block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie‐down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.

3-21

When Should an Airbag
Inflate?

whether the object is fixed or
moving, rigid or deformable, narrow
or wide.

Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries, mainly to the driver's or
front outboard passenger's head
and chest. However, they are only
designed to inflate if the impact
exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how
severe a crash is likely to be in time
for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.

Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.

Whether the frontal airbags will or
should inflate is not based primarily
on how fast the vehicle is traveling.
It depends on what is hit, the
direction of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at
different crash speeds depending on
whether the vehicle hits an object
straight on or at an angle, and

Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, the vehicle has
dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
Frontal knee airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe
frontal or near frontal impacts that
exceed a predetermined
deployment threshold.
The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full
deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-22

Black plate (22,1)

Seats and Restraints

The vehicle has seat-mounted side
impact airbags for the driver, front
passenger and for the second row
outboard passengers. The vehicle
has roof-rail airbags. See Airbag
System on page 3‑17.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags
and roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes depending on the location
of the impact. In addition, these
roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate during a rollover or in a
severe frontal impact. Seat-mounted
side impact airbags and roof-rail
airbags will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system's
designed threshold level. The
threshold level can vary with
specific vehicle design.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to
inflate in rear impacts.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to inflate on the side of
the vehicle that is struck. Both
roof-rail airbags will inflate when
either side of the vehicle is struck or
if the sensing system predicts that

the vehicle is about to roll over on
its side, or in a severe frontal
impact.

How Does an Airbag
Restrain?

In any particular crash, no one can
say whether an airbag should have
inflated simply because of the
vehicle damage or repair costs.

In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.

What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
and related hardware are all part of
the airbag module.
For airbag location, see Where Are
the Airbags? on page 3‑19.

Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts by
distributing the force of the impact
more evenly over the
occupant's body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
are designed to help contain the
head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the
first and second rows. The rollover
capable roof-rail airbags are
designed to help reduce the risk of
full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can
prevent all such ejections.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (23,1)

Seats and Restraints
But airbags would not help in many
types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 3‑21.
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.

What Will You See after
an Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they inflate. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbags, see Where Are the
Airbags? on page 3‑19.
The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may

be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out of
the windshield or being able to steer
the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.

3-23

The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn
on the interior lamps, turn on the
hazard warning flashers, and shut
off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn
off the interior lamps, and turn off
the hazard warning flashers by
using the controls for those
features.

{ WARNING
A crash severe enough to inflate
the airbags may have also
damaged important functions in
the vehicle, such as the fuel
system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-24

Seats and Restraints

In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the front outboard
passenger airbag.
.

.

Black plate (24,1)

Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
for the vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 13‑13 and Event Data
Recorders on page 13‑14.

.

Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for
service.

Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the front
outboard passenger position. The
passenger airbag status indicator
will light on the center display when
the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, will be visible
during the system check. If you use
remote start, if equipped, to start the
vehicle, you may not see the system
check. When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 5‑10.
The passenger sensing system
turns off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag and knee

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (25,1)

Seats and Restraints
airbag under certain conditions. No
other airbag is affected by the
passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of
the front outboard passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly seated
occupant and determine if the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag should be allowed
to inflate or not.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including: an
infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.

Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front. This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag inflates.

WARNING (CONTINUED)
inflate under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag(s) are off.

{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the passenger frontal
airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to
the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the
passenger frontal airbag inflates
and the passenger seat is in a
forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
outboard passenger airbag(s), no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
(Continued)

3-25

Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the front outboard passenger
seat, always move the seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag if:
.

The front outboard passenger
seat is unoccupied.

.

The system determines that an
infant is present in a child
restraint.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-26

Black plate (26,1)

Seats and Restraints

.

A front outboard passenger
takes his/her weight off of the
seat for a period of time.

.

There is a critical problem with
the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit as a reminder
that the airbags are off. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑10.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the front outboard
passenger seat. When the
passenger sensing system has
allowed the airbags to be enabled,
the on indicator will light and stay lit
as a reminder that the airbags are
active.

For some children, including
children in child restraints, and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn
off the front outboard passenger
frontal airbag and knee airbag,
depending upon the person's
seating posture and body build.
Everyone in the vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should
wear a safety belt properly —
whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.

{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑9 for more
information, including important
safety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for a
Child Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions provided
by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
Securing Child Restraints (Right
Front Passenger Seat) on
page 3‑45 or Securing Child
Restraints (Rear Seat) on
page 3‑48.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (27,1)

Seats and Restraints
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion,
if adjustable, to make sure that
the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into
the seat cushion. Also make
sure the child restraint is not
trapped under the vehicle head
restraint. If this happens, adjust
the head restraint. See Head
Restraints on page 3‑2.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant

6. Restart the vehicle.

If a person of adult size is sitting in
the front outboard passenger seat,
but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. Use the
following steps to allow the system
to detect that person and enable the
front outboard passenger frontal
airbag and knee airbag:

If the on indicator is still lit, secure
the child in the child restraint in a
rear seat position in the vehicle, and
check with your dealer.

3-27

2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.

1. Turn the vehicle off.

Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and
braking, which helps the passenger
sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional
information about the importance of
proper restraint use.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-28

Black plate (28,1)

Seats and Restraints

A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such as
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system
operates. We recommend that you
not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑28 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.

{ WARNING
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.

Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are parts
of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have
information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 13‑11.

{ WARNING
For up to 10 seconds after the
vehicle is turned off and the
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Adding accessories that change the
vehicle's frame, bumper system,
height, front end or side sheet
metal, may keep the airbag system
from working properly. The
operation of the airbag system can
also be affected by changing or
moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel,
instrument panel, roof-rail airbag
modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, front sensors, side
impact sensors, or airbag wiring.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (29,1)

Seats and Restraints
Your dealer and the service manual
have information about the location
of the airbag sensors, sensing and
diagnostic module, and airbag
wiring.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the
front outboard passenger position,
which includes sensors that are part
of the passenger seat. The
passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat
trim is replaced with non-GM
covers, upholstery, or trim; or with
GM covers, upholstery, or trim
designed for a different vehicle. Any
object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort-enhancing pad
or device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the
passenger sensing system. This
could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly

turning off the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑24.
The vehicle has rollover roof-rail
airbags, see Different Size Tires
and Wheels on page 10‑50 for
additional important information.
If you have to modify your vehicle
because you have a disability and
have questions about whether the
modifications will affect the vehicle's
airbag system, or if you have
questions about whether the airbag
system will be affected if the vehicle
is modified for any other reason, call
Customer Assistance. See
Customer Assistance Offices on
page 13‑3.

Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance or
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5‑9.

3-29

Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, the
airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbags, see
Where Are the Airbags? on
page 3‑19. See your dealer for
service.

Replacing Airbag System
Parts after a Crash

{ WARNING
A crash can damage the airbag
systems in the vehicle.
A damaged airbag system may
not work properly and may not
protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death. To
help make sure the airbag
(Continued)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-30

Black plate (30,1)

Seats and Restraints

WARNING (CONTINUED)
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.

Child Restraints
Older Children

If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
your dealer for service.
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly. Have
the vehicle serviced right away. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5‑9.

The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat, state
the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat
with a lap-shoulder belt until the
child passes the below fit test:
.

Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.

.

Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, then return to the
booster seat.

.

Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.

.

Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.

Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle's safety belts.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (31,1)

Seats and Restraints
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be

3-31

thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.

{ WARNING
Never allow more than one child
to wear the same safety belt. The
safety belt cannot properly spread
the impact forces. In a crash, they
can be crushed together and
seriously injured. A safety belt
must be used by only one person
at a time.

{ WARNING
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
(Continued)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-32

Black plate (32,1)

Seats and Restraints

WARNING (CONTINUED)
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.

Infants and Young
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants and
all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
(Continued)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (33,1)

Seats and Restraints
WARNING (CONTINUED)
arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate
restraint.

{ WARNING
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it
will go.

3-33

Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-34

Black plate (34,1)

Seats and Restraints

are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.

{ WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. In a
crash, if an infant is in a
rear-facing child restraint, the
crash forces can be distributed
across the strongest part of an
infant's body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always
be secured in rear-facing child
restraints.

{ WARNING
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

Child Restraint Systems

Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
Rear-Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat provides
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (35,1)

Seats and Restraints

3-35

Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

Forward-Facing Child Seat

Booster Seats

A forward-facing child seat provides
restraint for the child's body with the
harness.

A booster seat is a child restraint
designed to improve the fit of the
vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child
to see out the window.

A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑37.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-36

Black plate (36,1)

Seats and Restraints

Children can be endangered in a
crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
In some areas, Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technicians
(CPSTs) are available to inspect
and demonstrate how to correctly
use and install child restraints. In
the U.S., refer to the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) website to

locate the nearest child safety seat
inspection station. For CPST
availability in Canada, check with
Transport Canada or the Provincial
Ministry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child within the
Child Restraint

{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.

Where to Put the
Restraint
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.

We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front. This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
(Continued)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (37,1)

Seats and Restraints
WARNING (CONTINUED)
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag
is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑24 for additional
information.

When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with your
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
Child restraints and booster seats
vary considerably in size, and some
may fit in certain seating positions
better than others. Always make
sure the child restraint is properly
secured.
Depending on where you place the
child restraint and the size of the
child restraint, you may not be able
to access adjacent safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for
additional passengers or child
restraints. Adjacent seating
positions should not be used if the
child restraint prevents access to or
interferes with the routing of the
safety belt.
Wherever you install a child
restraint, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.

3-37

Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.

Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
The LATCH system secures a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
LATCH attachments on the child
restraint are used to attach the child
restraint to the anchors in the
vehicle. This system is designed to
make installation of a child restraint
easier.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-38

Black plate (38,1)

Seats and Restraints

a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in
your vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Top Tether Anchor

Lower anchors (1) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are two
lower anchors for each LATCH
seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (2).

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of
the child restraint to the vehicle.
A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether
attachment (2) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (39,1)

Seats and Restraints
The child restraint may have a
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4).
Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child
restraint.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations

3-39

To assist in locating the lower
anchors, each seating position with
lower anchors has two labels, near
the crease between the seatback
and the seat cushion.

To assist in locating the top tether
anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is on the trim near the
anchor.

I (Top Tether Anchor):

Seating
positions with top tether anchors.

H (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-40

Black plate (40,1)

Seats and Restraints
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 3‑36 for
additional information.

Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
The top tether anchors are on the
rear wall of the cargo area. Be sure
to use an anchor on the same side
of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will
be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.

{ WARNING
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and
the instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING
Do not attach more than one child
restraint to a single anchor.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
could be injured. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one
child restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
(Continued)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (41,1)

Seats and Restraints
WARNING (CONTINUED)
of the retractor to set the lock,
if the vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
If you need to secure more than one
child restraint in the rear seat, see
Where to Put the Restraint on
page 3‑36.
This system is designed to make
installation of child restraints easier.
When using lower anchors, do not

use the vehicle's safety belts.
Instead use the vehicle's anchors
and child restraint attachments to
secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired seating
position.

3-41

1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
For outboard rear seating
positions, if the head
restraint interferes with the
proper installation of the
child restraint, the head
restraint may be removed.
See “Head Restraint
Removal and
Reinstallation” at the end of
this section.
When installing a
rear-facing child restraint, it
may be necessary to move
the front seat forward to
properly install the child
restraint per the child
restraint manufacturer
instructions. See Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑3.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-42

Black plate (42,1)

Seats and Restraints

2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:

2.3. Route, attach, and tighten
the top tether according to
your child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Remove the cargo cover
before installing the top
tether. Place the cargo
cover on the floor of the
cargo area. The cargo
cover should remain off
while the top tether is
in use.

If you are using a single
tether in an outboard
seating position and the
head restraint has been
removed, route the tether
over the seatback.

If you are using a dual
tether in an outboard
seating position and the
head restraint has been
removed, route the tether
over the seatback and over
the inboard edge of the rear
speaker.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (43,1)

Seats and Restraints
If the rear outboard seating
position you are using has
an adjustable head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether, raise the head
restraint and route the
tether under the head
restraint and around the
head restraint posts.
If the rear outboard seating
position you are using has
an adjustable head restraint
and you are using a single
tether, raise the head
restraint and route the
tether under the head
restraint and in between the
head restraint posts.

3-43

To remove the head restraint:
1. Partially fold the seatback
forward. See Rear Seats on
page 3‑6 for additional
information.

3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. There should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement for proper installation.

Head Restraint Removal and
Reinstallation
The rear outboard head restraints
can be removed if they interfere with
the proper installation of the child
restraint.

2. Press both buttons on the head
restraint posts at the same time,
and pull up on the head
restraint.
3. Store the head restraint in the
cargo area of the vehicle inside
the cargo net.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-44

Black plate (44,1)

Seats and Restraints

4. When the child restraint is
removed, reinstall the head
restraint before the seating
position is used.

To reinstall the head restraint:

Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash

{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.

3. Try to move the head restraint to
make sure that it is locked in
place.

{ WARNING

1. Insert the head restraint posts
into the holes in the top of the
seatback. The notches on the
posts must face the driver side
of the vehicle.
2. Push the head restraint down.
If necessary, press the height
adjustment release button to
further lower the head restraint.
See Head Restraints on
page 3‑2.

A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even
death in a crash. To help make
sure the LATCH system is
working properly after a crash,
see your dealer to have the
system inspected and any
necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (45,1)

Seats and Restraints
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints
(Right Front
Passenger Seat)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat
is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See
Where to Put the Restraint on
page 3‑36.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag under certain
conditions. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑24 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑10 for more information
on this, including important safety
information.

Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front. This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the passenger frontal
airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to
the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the
passenger frontal airbag inflates
and the passenger seat is in a
forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
outboard passenger airbag(s), no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
(Continued)

3-45

WARNING (CONTINUED)
inflate under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag(s) are off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the front outboard passenger
seat, always move the seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑37 for how to
install your child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
using a safety belt and it uses a top
tether, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑37 for top tether
anchor locations.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-46

Black plate (46,1)

Seats and Restraints

Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.

the vehicle. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on
page 5‑10.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.

You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.

4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.

1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
outboard passenger frontal
airbag and knee airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger
airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when you start

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the
belt if needed.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (47,1)

Seats and Restraints

3-47

7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.

If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator will come on and
stay on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the off symbol is not lit, see “If
the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑24.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt
and let it go back all the way.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-48

Black plate (48,1)

Seats and Restraints

Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑37 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑37 for top tether anchor
locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 3‑36.

1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
If the head restraint interferes
with the proper installation of the
child restraint, the head restraint
may be removed. See “Head
Restraint Removal and
Reinstallation” under Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑37.
When installing a rear-facing
child restraint, it may be
necessary to move the front seat
forward to properly install the
child restraint per the child
restraint manufacturer
instructions. See Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑3.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (49,1)

Seats and Restraints

3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.

3-49

5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

3-50

Black plate (50,1)

Seats and Restraints

6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑37 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it. If the
head restraint was removed,
reinstall it before the seating
position is used. See “Head
Restraint Removal and

Reinstallation” under Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑37.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (1,1)

Storage

Storage
Storage Compartments
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Shopping Bag Hooks . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Storage
Compartments

Additional Storage
Features

Glove Box

Cargo Cover

Lift up on the glove box lever to
open it.

4-1

{ WARNING
An unsecured cargo cover could
strike people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash. Store the
cargo cover securely or remove it
from the vehicle.
The cargo cover can be used to
cover items in the rear of the
vehicle.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

4-2

Black plate (2,1)

Storage

Shopping Bag Hooks

To remove the cargo cover:

To install the cargo cover:

1. Remove both of the cords (1)
from the hooks at the top of the
liftgate.

1. Align the cargo cover (3) on the
trim panel edge (2) on both sides
and push it forward, locking the
cargo cover into the hooks (1).

2. Pull the cargo cover (2) rearward
to release the cargo cover.

2. Reconnect both of the cords to
the hooks at the top of the
liftgate.

The vehicle has a shopping bag
hook under the front seat headrests.
Lift the headrests to access
the hook.

Cargo Net
The cargo net is located in the trunk
and used to store small loads. The
net should not be used to store
heavy loads.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (3,1)

Storage

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING
If something is carried on top of
the vehicle that is longer or wider
than the roof rack — like paneling,
plywood, or a mattress — the
wind can catch it while the vehicle
is being driven. The item being
carried could be violently torn off,
and this could cause a collision
and damage the vehicle. Never
carry something longer or wider
than the roof rack on top of the
vehicle unless using a GM
certified accessory carrier.
For vehicles with a roof rack, the
rack can be used to load items. For
roof racks that do not have
crossrails included, GM Certified
crossrails can be purchased as an
accessory. See your dealer for
additional information.

Notice: Loading cargo on the
roof rack that weighs more than
75 kg (165 lbs) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
so that it rests evenly between
the crossrails, making sure to
fasten cargo securely.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo
when driving, check to make sure
crossrails and cargo are securely
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
rack will make the vehicle’s center
of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
braking, or abrupt maneuvers;
otherwise it may result in loss of
control. If driving for a long distance,
on rough roads, or at high speeds,
occasionally stop the vehicle to
make sure the cargo remains in its
place.

4-3

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle
capacity when loading the vehicle.
For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑9.
Check that all cargo is securely
fastened to prevent damage or loss
while driving.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

4-4

Black plate (4,1)

Storage

2 NOTES

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (1,1)

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and
Controls
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3
Rear Window Wiper/
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-6
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-8

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-9
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . 5-9
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Charging System Light . . . . . . . 5-11
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Service Vehicle Soon
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Owner Manual Indicator . . . . . 5-14
Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Power Steering Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-16
Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-17
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

5-1

Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-18
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-19
Immobilizer Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Reduced Engine Power
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-20
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-20
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-25

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-2

Black plate (2,1)

Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering Wheel Controls

Steering Wheel
Adjustment

5 / g (Push to Talk): Vehicles with
a Bluetooth or OnStar, press to
interact with those systems. See
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑20
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
on page 7‑21 or OnStar Overview
on page 14‑1.
> / R (Mute/End Call):

Press to
silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar or
Bluetooth systems, press to reject
an incoming call, or end a
current call.

To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.

For vehicles with audio steering
wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.

¦ or ¥ SEEK (Next/Previous):
Press to go to the next or previous
radio station, song on an iPod® or
file on a USB device (if equipped).

+ or − x : Press + or − to increase
or decrease the volume.

Horn
Press a on the steering wheel pad
to sound the horn.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (3,1)

Instruments and Controls

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer lever
is on the right side of the steering
column.
Move the lever to one of the
following positions:
HI: Use for fast wipes.
LO: Use for slow wipes.
INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Move
the lever up to INT for intermittent
wipes, then turn the x INT band
up for more frequent wipes or down
for less frequent wipes.
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 (Mist):

For a single wipe, briefly
move the wiper lever down. For
several wipes, hold the wiper
lever down.

Clear snow and ice from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen
to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
should be replaced. See Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 10‑22.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
stop the motor until it cools down.

Windshield Washer
Pull the windshield wiper lever
toward you to spray windshield
washer fluid and activate the wipers.
The wipers will continue until the
lever is released or the maximum
wash time is reached.
When the windshield wiper lever is
released, additional wipes may
occur depending on how long the
windshield washer had been
activated. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑17 for information on filling
the windshield washer fluid
reservoir.

5-3

{ WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use
the washer until the windshield is
warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.

Rear Window Wiper/
Washer
For vehicles with the rear wiper/
washer, the controls are on the end
of the windshield wiper lever.

Turn the rear wiper/washer band to
operate the rear window wiper/
washer.
ON: Turns the rear wiper on for
continuous wipes.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-4

Black plate (4,1)

Instruments and Controls

OFF: Turns the rear wiper off.

Setting the Time and Date

= (Rear Washer):

1. Press H or CONFIG button and
select Time and Data Settings.

Sprays washer
fluid on the rear window. The control
returns to its starting position when
released.
The rear window wiper will stop
when the transmission is in
N (Neutral) or the liftgate is open.
It also stops for 10 seconds when
the transmission is shifted from
N (Neutral) to other gears.
The windshield washer reservoir is
used for the windshield and the rear
window. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir if either washer is not
working. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑17.

Clock
Radio Without Touchscreen
The infotainment system controls
are used to access the time and
date settings through the menu
system. See Operation on page 7‑5
for information about how to use the
menu system.

2. Select Set Time or Set Date.
3. Turn the Menu Tune knob to the
desired value.

Setting the Month and Day
Format
1. Press the H or CONFIG button
and select Time and Date
Settings.
2. Select Set Date Format.

4. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select the value.

3. Turn the Menu Tune knob to the
desired setting.

5. Turn the Menu Tune knob to
change the desired value.
6. To save and return to the Time
Settings menu, press / BACK
button at any time.

4. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select the DD/MM/YYYY (day/
month/year), MM/DD/YYYY
(month/day/year), or YYYY/MM/
DD (year/month/day) display
format.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format

Radio With Touchscreen

1. Press the H or CONFIG button
and select Time and Date
Settings.

The infotainment system controls
are used to access the time and
date settings through the menu
system. See Operation on page 7‑5
for information about how to use the
menu system.

2. Select Set Time Format.
3. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select the 12 hour or 24 hour
display format.

Setting the Time and Date
1. Press D, and then press
settings.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (5,1)

Instruments and Controls
2. Press time and date settings,
and then set time and date.
3. Press y or
value.

z to adjust the

4. Press OK.

Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format

The vehicle has an accessory
power outlet located in front of the
cupholders on the center stack.

1. Press D , and then press
settings.

Open the cover to access and
replace when not in use.

2. Press time and date settings,
and then set time format.
3. Select 12/24 HR Format.

Setting the Month and Day
Format
1. Press D , and then press
settings.
2. Press time and date settings,
and then set date format.
3. Set the date display to DD/MM/
YYYY (day/month/year), MM/
DD/YYYY (month/day/year),
or YYYY/MM/DD (year/month/
day) display format.

{ WARNING
Power is always supplied to the
outlets. Do not leave electrical
equipment plugged in when the
vehicle is not in use because the
vehicle could catch fire and cause
injury or death.
Notice: Leaving electrical
equipment plugged in for an
extended period of time while the
vehicle is off will drain the
battery. Always unplug electrical
equipment when not in use and

5-5

do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
rating.
Certain accessory power plugs may
not be compatible with the
accessory power outlet and could
overload vehicle or adapter fuses.
If a problem is experienced, see
your dealer.
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the proper
installation instructions included with
the equipment. See Add-On
Electrical Equipment on page 9‑37.
Notice: Hanging heavy
equipment from the power outlet
can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty. The
power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only, such
as cell phone charge cords.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-6

Black plate (6,1)

Instruments and Controls

Warning Lights,
Gauges, and
Indicators

Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.

Warning lights and gauges can
signal that something is wrong
before it becomes serious enough
to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.

Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
and even dangerous.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (7,1)

Instruments and Controls

Instrument Cluster

English Automatic Transmission Shown, Metric and Manual Transmission Similar

5-7

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-8

Black plate (8,1)

Instruments and Controls

Speedometer
The speedometer shows the
vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph).

Odometer

The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.

Trip Odometer

The trip odometer measures the
distance the vehicle has been
driven since the function was last
reset.

The fuel gauge indicates about how
much fuel is left when the ignition is
turned to ON/RUN.

Tachometer

When the tank nears empty, the low
fuel warning light will come on.
There is still a little fuel left, but the
vehicle's fuel tank should be filled
soon. See Low Fuel Warning Light
on page 5‑19 for more information.

The tachometer displays the engine
speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).

An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates on which side of the
vehicle the fuel door is located.

Fuel Gauge

Here are four things that some
owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:

To reset the trip odometer to zero,
see Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑21.

.

At the service station, the gas
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.

.

It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (9,1)

Instruments and Controls
.

The indicator moves a little when
turning a corner or speeding up.

.

The gauge goes back to empty
when the ignition is turned off.

Safety Belt Reminders
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
There is a driver safety belt
reminder light on the instrument
cluster.

5-9

If the driver safety belt is buckled,
neither the chime nor the light
comes on.

If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.

Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light

The front passenger safety belt
warning light and chime may turn on
if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
bag, laptop, or other electronic
device. To turn off the warning light
and/or chime, remove the object
from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.

There is a passenger safety belt
reminder light near the passenger
airbag status indicator. See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑24.

Airbag Readiness Light

When the vehicle is started, this
light flashes and a chime may come
on to remind the driver to fasten
their safety belt. Then the light stays
on solid until the belt is buckled.
This cycle may continue several
times if the driver remains or
becomes unbuckled while the
vehicle is moving.

When the vehicle is started, this
light flashes and a chime may come
on to remind passengers to fasten
their safety belt. Then the light stays
on solid until the belt is buckled.
This cycle continues several times if
the passenger remains or becomes
unbuckled while the vehicle is
moving.

This light shows if there is an
electrical problem with the airbag
system. The system check includes
the airbag sensor(s), passenger
sensing system, the pretensioners
(if equipped), the airbag modules,
the wiring, and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system,
see Airbag System on page 3‑17.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-10

Black plate (10,1)

Instruments and Controls
If there is a problem with the airbag
system, a Driver Information Center
(DIC) message may also come on.
See Vehicle Messages on
page 5‑25.

The airbag readiness light comes on
for several seconds when the
vehicle is started. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed
immediately.

{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.

Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑24 for
important safety information. The
center display has a passenger
airbag status indicator.

United States

Canada
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. If you use
remote start, if equipped, to start the
vehicle, you may not see the system
check. Then, after several seconds,
the status indicator will light either
ON or OFF, or the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the
front outboard passenger frontal
airbag and knee airbag.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (11,1)

Instruments and Controls
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag are allowed to
inflate.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag and knee
airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system. See
your dealer for service.

{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑9 for more
information, including important
safety information.

Charging System Light

This light will come on briefly when
the ignition is turned on, and the
engine is not running, as a check to
show it is working.
It should go out when the engine is
started. If it stays on, or comes on
while driving, there may be a
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your

5-11

dealer. Driving while this light is on
could drain the battery. If a short
distance must be driven with the
light on, turn off all accessories,
such as the radio and air
conditioner, to help reduce the drain
on the battery.

Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors the operation
of the vehicle to ensure emissions
are at acceptable levels, helping to
maintain a clean environment. The
malfunction indicator lamp comes
on when the vehicle is placed in
ON/RUN, as a check to show it is
working. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer. See
Ignition Positions on page 9‑14 for
more information.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-12

Black plate (12,1)

Instruments and Controls

If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on while the engine is
running, this indicates that the OBD
II system has detected a problem
and diagnosis and service might be
required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system also
assists the service technician in
correctly diagnosing any
malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is
continually driven with this light
on, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle fuel
economy might not be as good,
and the engine might not run as

smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.

could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.

Notice: Modifications made to the
engine, transmission, exhaust,
intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than
those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the
vehicle warranty. This could also
result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/
Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.

To prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle:

This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and

.

Reduce vehicle speed.

.

Avoid hard accelerations.

.

Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, find a
safe place to stop and park the
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
least 10 seconds, and restart the
engine. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see
your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (13,1)

Instruments and Controls
The following may correct an
emission control system
malfunction:
.

.

Check that the fuel cap is fully
installed. See Filling the Tank on
page 9‑35. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the
light off.
Check that good quality fuel is
used. Poor fuel quality causes
the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and may
cause stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.

5-13

If one or more of these conditions
occurs, change the fuel brand used.
It may require at least one full tank
of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑33.
If none of the above have made the
light turn off, your dealer can check
the vehicle. The dealer has the
proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.

The DLC is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
wheel. See your dealer if assistance
is needed.
The vehicle may not pass
inspection if:
.

The malfunction indicator lamp is
on with the engine running, or if
the light does not come on when
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
while the engine is off. See your
dealer for assistance in verifying
proper operation of the
malfunction indicator lamp.

.

The OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics) system determines
that critical emission control
systems have not been
completely diagnosed. The
vehicle would be considered not
ready for inspection. This can

Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Depending on where you live, your
vehicle may be required to
participate in an emission control
system inspection and maintenance
program. For the inspection, the
emission system test equipment will
likely connect to the vehicle's Data
Link Connector (DLC).

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-14

Black plate (14,1)

Instruments and Controls

happen if the 12-volt battery has
recently been replaced or run
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II
system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for
inspection.

Service Vehicle Soon
Light

If the light comes on, take the
vehicle to your dealer for service as
soon as possible.

Owner Manual Indicator

This symbol is shown when you
need to see the owner manual for
additional instructions or
information.

If the warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away.

{ WARNING
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.

Brake System Warning
Light

For vehicles with this light, it comes
on if a condition exists that may
require the vehicle to be taken in for
service.

The vehicle brake system consists
of two hydraulic circuits. If one
circuit is not working, the remaining
circuit can still work to stop the
vehicle. For normal braking
performance, both circuits need to
be working

Metric

English

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (15,1)

Instruments and Controls
This light should come on briefly
when the ignition is turned to ON.
If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light will also come
on when the parking brake is set.
The light will stay on if the parking
brake does not fully release. If it
stays on after the parking brake is
fully released, it means there is a
brake problem.
If the light comes on while driving,
carefully pull off the road and stop.
The pedal may be harder to push or
may go closer to the floor. It may
take longer to stop. If the light is still
on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑65.

Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light

5-15

problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑14.
The ABS warning light will come on
briefly when the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN. This is normal. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn if there is
a problem.

This light comes on briefly when the
engine is started.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF or if the light comes
on, stop as soon as possible and
turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system.
If the light still stays on, or comes
on again while driving, the vehicle
needs service. See your dealer.
If the regular brake system warning
light is not on, the brakes will still
work, but the antilock brakes will not
work. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, the antilock
brakes will not work and there is a

Up-Shift Light

For manual transmission vehicles,
there is an up-shift light that comes
on in the lower DIC area. It shows
when to shift to the next higher gear
for best fuel economy.
See Manual Transmission on
page 9‑24.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-16

Black plate (16,1)

Instruments and Controls

Power Steering Warning
Light

Traction Off Light

See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑27 and StabiliTrak®
System on page 9‑29.

StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly when the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN as a
check to show it is working.
If it does not come on have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If this light stays on, or comes on
while driving, the system may not be
working. If this happens, see your
dealer for service.

This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. If the system is working
normally, the indicator light then
turns off.
The traction off light comes on when
the Traction Control System (TCS)
has been turned off by pressing and
releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak
button.
This light and the StabiliTrak OFF
light come on when StabiliTrak is
turned off.
If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not
limited. Adjust driving accordingly.

This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer.
This light comes on when the
StabiliTrak system is turned off.
If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction
Control System (TCS) is also off.
If the TCS is off, the system does
not assist in controlling the vehicle.
Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTrak
systems and the warning light
turns off.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (17,1)

Instruments and Controls
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑27 and StabiliTrak®
System on page 9‑29.

If the indicator/warning light is on
and flashing, the TCS and/or the
StabiliTrak system is actively
working.

Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

See StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑29 and Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑27.

Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light

If the light is on and not flashing, the
TCS, and potentially the StabiliTrak
system have been disabled.

Notice: Driving with the engine
coolant temperature warning light
on could cause the vehicle to
overheat. See Engine Overheating
on page 10‑16. The vehicle's
engine could be damaged, and it
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never drive with
the engine coolant temperature
warning light on.
The engine coolant temperature
warning light comes on when the
engine has overheated.
If this happens, pull over and turn
off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑16.

The StabiliTrak or Traction Control
System (TCS) indicator/warning
light comes on briefly when the
engine is started.
If the light does not come on, have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally,
the indicator light turns off.

5-17

This light comes on briefly while
starting the vehicle.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by the dealer. If the system
is working normally the indicator
light goes off.

Tire Pressure Light

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-18

Black plate (18,1)

Instruments and Controls

For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this light
comes on briefly when the engine is
started. It provides information
about tire pressures and the TPMS.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

When the Light Is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of
the tires are significantly
underinflated.
Stop as soon as possible, and
inflate the tires to the pressure value
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire Pressure
on page 10‑41.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then Is On Steady
If the light flashes for about a minute
and then stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. If the
problem is not corrected, the light
will come on at every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑43.

The oil pressure light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. Driving with the engine
oil low can also damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Check the oil level as soon as
possible. Add oil if required, but
if the oil level is within the
operating range and the oil
pressure is still low, have the
vehicle serviced. Always follow
the maintenance schedule for
changing engine oil.

If the vehicle has low engine oil
pressure, this light will stay on after
the engine is started, or come on
while driving.
This indicates that the engine is not
receiving enough oil. The engine
could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it
fixed immediately by your dealer.
The oil pressure light could also
come on in other situations:
.

When the ignition is on but the
engine is not running, the light
will come on as a test to show it
is working. The light will go out
when the ignition is turned on.
If it does not come on with the
ignition on, there may be a
problem with the fuse or bulb.
Have it fixed right away.

.

If the vehicle comes to a hard
stop, the light may come on for a
moment. This is normal.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (19,1)

Instruments and Controls

Low Fuel Warning Light

vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally,
the indicator light turns off.
If the light stays on and the engine
does not start, there could be a
problem with the immobilizer
system. See Immobilizer Operation
on page 2‑9.

The low fuel warning light comes on
briefly when the vehicle is started.
This light also comes on when the
fuel level is low. When fuel is added,
the light should go off. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced.

Reduced Engine Power
Light

5-19

vehicle and turn off the ignition. Wait
for 10 seconds and restart the
vehicle. This might correct the
condition.
The vehicle can be driven at a
reduced speed when the reduced
engine power light is on but
acceleration and speed might be
reduced. The performance could be
reduced until the next time the
vehicle is driven. If this light stays
on, see your dealer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair.

High-Beam On Light

Immobilizer Light
The reduced engine power light
should come on briefly as the
engine is started. If it does not come
on have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer.
The immobilizer light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on, have the

This light, along with the service
engine soon light, displays when a
noticeable reduction in the vehicle's
performance occurs. Stop the

This light comes on when the
high-beam headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑2 for more
information.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-20

Black plate (20,1)

Instruments and Controls

Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) Indicator Light

For vehicles with front fog lamps,
this light, in the display on the top of
the center stack, comes on when
the front fog lamps are in use.

Cruise Control Light

The light goes out when the front
fog lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 6‑3.

Lamps On Reminder
This light, in the display on the top
of the center stack, turns on
whenever the Daytime Running
Lamps are in use.

The light turns off when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑30.

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
on page 6‑2.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with cruise control, the
cruise control light is white when the
cruise control is on and ready, and
turns green when the cruise control
is set and active.

The lamps on reminder light comes
on when the exterior lamps are in
use. See Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (21,1)

Instruments and Controls

Door Ajar Light

Information Displays

5-21

DIC Buttons

Driver Information
Center (DIC)

This light comes on when a door is
open or not securely latched. Before
driving, check that all doors are
properly closed.

The DIC displays information about
the vehicle. It also displays warning
messages if a system problem is
detected. See Vehicle Messages on
page 5‑25. All messages appear in
the DIC display in the instrument
cluster.

DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different displays,
which can be accessed by using the
DIC buttons on the right side of the
instrument cluster.

MENU: Press to display the DIC
menus. Some items display in the
upper display area, some in the
lower display area, and others use
both the upper and lower display
areas.

w or x : Use to scroll through the
menus.
SET/CLR: Press to set or clear the
menu item displayed.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-22

Black plate (22,1)

Instruments and Controls

Odo/Trip Menu Items

Menu 1

Press MENU until the upper display
area flashes. Use w or x to scroll
through the menu items. Not all
items are available on every vehicle.
The following is a list of all possible
menu items:

Press MENU until the lower display
area flashes. Use w or x to scroll
through the menu items. Not all
items are available on every vehicle.
The following is a list of all possible
menu items:

.

Odometer

.

Average Fuel Economy

.

Trip A

.

Fuel Range

.

Trip B

.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy

Odometer

.

Average Speed

This displays the current distance
traveled, in either kilometers (km) or
miles (mi). This display cannot be
reset.

.

Timer

Trip A or B
This displays the current distance
traveled, in either kilometers (km) or
miles (mi), from the last reset for the
trip odometer. To reset the trip
odometer, press and hold SET/CLR
while the trip odometer is being
displayed.

Average Fuel Economy

English Shown, Metric Similar
This display shows the approximate
average liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) or miles per
gallon (mpg). This number is
calculated based on the number of
L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the
last time this menu item was reset.
To reset the average fuel economy,
press and hold the SET/CLR button
while the average fuel economy is
displayed.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (23,1)

Instruments and Controls
Fuel Range

driving conditions change. Unlike
average economy, this display
cannot be reset.

5-23

Timer

Average Speed

Metric Shown, English Similar
This displays the approximate
distance the vehicle can be driven
without refueling. The fuel range
estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle's fuel economy over
recent driving history and the
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. When the range is low, FILL
FUEL will be displayed.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
This display shows the current fuel
economy in liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) or miles per gallon
(mpg). This number reflects only the
fuel economy that the vehicle has
right now and changes frequently as

English Shown, Metric Similar
This display shows the average
speed. To reset the average speed
to zero, press and hold the SET/
CLR button while the average
speed is displayed.

This display can be used as a timer.
To start the timer, press SET/CLR
while the timer is displayed. The
display will show the amount of time
that has passed since the timer was
last reset, not including time the
ignition is off. The timer will record
up to 99:59 hours, after which the
display will return to 0:00. To reset
the timer to 0:00, press and hold
SET/CLR.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-24

Black plate (24,1)

Instruments and Controls

Menu 2
Press MENU until one of the
following items is displayed on the
upper and lower display areas. Use
w or x to scroll through the menu
items. Not all items are available on
every vehicle. The following is a list
of all possible menu items:
.

Remaining Oil Life

.

Units

.

Tire Learn

Remaining Oil Life
This display shows an estimate of
the oil's remaining useful life.
If 99 : % is displayed, that
means 99% of the current oil life
remains.
When the remaining oil life is low,
the Code 82 message will appear
on the display. The oil should be
changed as soon as possible. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑7. In addition
to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended in the

Maintenance Schedule. See
Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑2.
Remember, the oil life display must
be reset after each oil change. It will
not reset itself. Also, be careful not
to reset the oil life display
accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until
the next oil change. To reset the
engine oil life system, see Engine
Oil Life System on page 10‑9.
Units
Press SET/CLR and move w or x
to change units when UNIT is
displayed. Select 1, 2, or 3 for the
unit display. 1 is Imperial units, 2 is
US units, and 3 is metric units.
Press and hold SET/CLR to confirm
the setting. The number will flash.
This will change the displays on the
cluster and DIC to the type of
measurements selected.

Tire Learn
This display allows for matching of
the TPMS sensors. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on
page 10‑42 and Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 10‑43.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (25,1)

Instruments and Controls

Vehicle Messages
DIC messages display when the
status of the vehicle has changed
and action may be needed to
correct the condition. Multiple
messages appear one after another.
All messages should be taken
seriously.
Vehicle messages appear as code
numbers. The owner manual
indicator and service vehicle soon
light may also be displayed.
The following is a list of all possible
messages. Depending on the
vehicle, some of these messages
may not be available.
10: Brakes Overheated
15: Check High Mounted
Brake Lamp
16: Check Brake Lamps
17: Headlamp Leveling Malfunction
— Contact Service
18: Left Low Beam Failure
20: Right Low Beam Failure

21: Check Left Position Lamp
22: Check Right Position Lamp
23: Reversing Lamp Failure
24: License Plate Lamp Failure
25: Left Front Turn Indicator Failure
26: Left Rear Turn Indicator Failure
27: Right Front Turn Indicator
Failure
28: Right Rear Turn Indicator
Failure
58: Winter Tire Recognition
65: Theft Attempted
75: Service AC System
81: Service Transmission
82: Change Engine Oil Soon
89: Service Vehicle Soon
95: Service Airbag

5-25

Vehicle
Personalization
Personalization Menu (Radio
Without Touchscreen)
The audio system controls and
touchscreen are used to access the
personalization menus for
customizing vehicle features.
The following are all possible
personalization features. Depending
on the vehicle some may not be
available.
CONFIG (Configuration): Press to
access the Configuration
Settings Menu.
MENU TUNE: Turn to scroll
through the menus or setup items.
Press to enter the menus and select
the menu items.

/ BACK : Press to exit, or return to
the previous screen or menu.
To access a menu:
1. Press the CONFIG button.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-26

Black plate (26,1)

Instruments and Controls

2. Turn the MENU TUNE knob to
select the desired menu.

2. Press the MENU TUNE knob to
select.

3. Press the MENU TUNE knob.

Press / BACK to go back to the
last menu.

Settings menus and functions may
vary depending on vehicle option.
Press the CONFIG button and the
following list of menu items may be
available:
.

Languages

.
.

Select this to manually set the date.

Select the Time and Data Settings
menu and the following may be
displayed:

1. Turn the Menu Tune knob to the
desired value.

Time and Data Settings

Set Time

.

Radio Settings

Set Data

.

.

Vehicle Settings

Set Time Format

.

.

Comfort & Convenience

Set Date Format

.

Auto Time Adjust

Select the Language menu and the
following may be displayed:
.

English

.

French

.

Spanish

1. Turn MENU TUNE to the desired
language.

Set Date

Time and Data Settings

.

Language

4. To save and return to the Time
Settings menu, press / BACK
button at any time.

2. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select the value.
3. Turn the Menu Tune knob to
change the desired value.
4. To save and return to the Time
Settings menu, press / BACK
button at any time.

Set Time

Set Time Format

Select this to manually set the time.

Select this to set the 12/24 hour
format.

1. Turn the Menu Tune knob to the
desired value.
2. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select the value.
3. Turn the Menu Tune knob to
change the desired value.

1. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select the 12 hour or 24 hour
display format.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (27,1)

Instruments and Controls
Set Date Format

Auto Volume

Select this to set the month and day
format.

The auto volume feature
automatically adjusts the radio
volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
or slows down, so that the volume
level is consistent.

1. Turn the Menu Tune knob to the
desired setting.
2. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select the DD/MM/YYYY (day/
month/year), MM/DD/YYYY
(month/day/year), or YYYY/MM/
DD (year/month/day) display
format.

1. Turn the Menu Tune knob to the
desired value.
2. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select the value.

Auto Time Adjust

Maximum Startup Volume

Select this to turn the auto time
adjust on or off.

Select this to manually set the
startup volume of the radio.

1. Press the Menu Tune knob to
turn On or Off.

1. Turn the Menu Tune knob to
increase or decrease the value.

Radio Settings

2. To save press the Menu Tune or
/ BACK button.

Select the Radio Settings menu and
the following may be displayed:
.

Auto Volume

.

Maximum Startup Volume

.

Radio Favorites

5-27

2. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select the value.

Vehicle Settings
Select the Radio Settings menu and
the following may be displayed:
.

Comfort and Convenience

.

Lighting

.

Power Door Locks

.

Lock, Unlock, Settings

.

Vehicle Factory Settings

Comfort and Convenience
Select the Comfort and
Convenience menu and the
following may be displayed:
.

Chime Volume

.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

Radio Favorites

Chime Volume

This feature allows for the manually
setting of the number of favorite
pages.

Select this to set the chime volume
level to Normal or High.

1. Turn the Menu Tune knob to
select 1-6.

1. Turn the Menu Tune knob to
select Chime Volume.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-28

Instruments and Controls

2. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select.
3. Turn the Menu Tune knob to the
desired level.
4. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select the level.
Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear
This allows selection of the Auto
Wipe in Reverse Gear feature to be
turned on or off. When on, and the
front wipers are on, the rear window
wiper will turn on automatically
when the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse).
1. Turn the Menu Tune knob to
select Auto Wipe in
Reverse Gear.
2. Press the Menu Tune knob to
turn On or Off.

Lighting
Select the Lighting menu and the
following may be displayed:
.

Black plate (28,1)

Exit Lighting

Exit Lighting
This allows the selection of how
long the exterior lamps stay on
when leaving the vehicle and it is
dark outside.
1. Turn the Menu Tune knob to the
desired time.
2. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select.

Power Door Locks
Select Power Door Locks and the
following may be displayed:
.

Auto Door Unlock

.

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

.

Delayed Door Lock

Auto Door Unlock
This allows selection of which of the
doors will automatically unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park),
select from All Doors, Driver Door,
or Off.
1. Turn the Menu Tune knob to the
desired selection.

2. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
When on, this feature will keep the
driver door from locking when the
door is open. If Off is selected, the
Delayed Door Lock menu will be
available and the door will lock as
programmed through this menu.
1. Turn the Menu Tune knob to On
or Off.
2. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select.
Delayed Door Lock
When on, this feature will delay the
locking of the doors after the last
door is closed.
1. Turn the Menu Tune knob to On
or Off.
2. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (29,1)

Instruments and Controls
Lock, Unlock, Settings
Select Power Door Locks and the
following may be displayed:
.

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

.

Remote Lock Light and Horn
Feedback

.

Remote Door Unlock

Remote Unlock Light Feedback
When on, the exterior lamps will
flash when unlocking the vehicle
with the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, select Flash
Lights or Lights Off.
1. Turn the Menu Tune knob to the
desired selection.
2. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select.
Remote Lock Light and Horn
Feedback
This allows the selection of what
type of feedback is given when
pressing Q on the RKE transmitter,
select from Lights and Horn, Lights
only, Horn Only, or Off.

1. Turn the Menu Tune knob to the
desired selection.
2. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select.
Remote Door Unlock
This allows selection of which doors
will unlock when pressing K on the
RKE transmitter, select from All
Doors or Driver Door.
When set to Driver Door, the driver
door will unlock the first timeK is
pressed and all doors will unlock
when the button is pressed a
second time. When set to All Doors,
all of the doors will unlock at the first
press ofK.
1. Turn the Menu Tune knob to the
desired selection.
2. Press the Menu Tune knob to
select.

Vehicle Factory Settings
Select Vehicle Factory Settings to
return all of the vehicle
personalization to the default

5-29

settings. Press MENU TUNE when
Vehicle Factory Settings is selected
and open the menu. Select Yes or
No by turning and pressing the
MENU TUNE knob.

Personalization Menu (Radio
With Touchscreen)
Settings can be made with the
ignition ON and the vehicle not
moving.
The following are all possible
personalization features. Depending
on the vehicle some may not be
available.

D (Home): Press to access the
Home Page Menu.
Q or R : Press to scroll through the
menus or setup items.
4:

Press to exit, or return to the
previous screen or menu.
To access the menu:
1. Press

D.

2. Press Settings.
3. Press Vehicle Settings.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-30

Instruments and Controls

Press the menu item to select it.
Each of the menus is detailed in the
following information.
Settings menus and functions may
vary depending on vehicle option.
The following list of menu items may
be available:
.
.

Climate & Air Quality
Cluster display info

.

Comfort & Convenience

.

Collision/detection

.
.

Lighting
Power Door Locks

.

Lock, Unlock Settings

.

Rear Camera Option

.

Black plate (30,1)

Vehicle Factory Settings

.

About

.

DivX® VOD

Climate and Air Quality
Select the Climate and Air Quality
menu and the following may be
displayed:

Press Auto Fan Speed when
highlighted. Select Low, Medium,
or High. Press 4.
Auto Compartment Zone Temp
This allows the selection of the
compartment zone temperature
setting when the vehicle is
restarted.

.

Auto Fan Speed

.

Auto Compartment Zone Temp

.

Rear Zone Temp

.

Air Quality Sensor

.

Air Conditioning Mode

Press Auto Compartment Zone
Temp when highlighted. Select
Single Zone, Dual Zone, or Last
Setting. Press 4.

.

Auto Defog

Rear Zone Temp

.

Auto Rear Defog

.

Auto Cooled Vented Seats

This allows the selection of the rear
temperature setting when the
vehicle is restarted.

.

Auto Heated Seats

.

Remote Start Auto Seat Cool

.

Remote Start Heated Seats

.

Sport Mode Settings

.

Language

.

Text Scroll

Auto Fan Speed

.

Touch Beep Volume

.

Max Startup Volume

This allows the selection of the
automatic fan speed. It can be
adjusted to run lower or higher than
normal.

Press Rear Zone Temp when
highlighted. Select Off, Rear Mimic
Front, or Rear Last Known.
Press 4.
Air Quality Sensor
This allows the selection of whether
the system will operate at high or
low sensitivity.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (31,1)

Instruments and Controls
Press Air Quality Sensor when
highlighted. Select Off, Low
Sensitivity, High Sensitivity.
Press 4.
Air Conditioning Mode
This allows the selection of
automatic start of the air
conditioning upon vehicle start.
Selecting On indicates the air
conditioning will be on when the
vehicle is started. Selecting Off
turns the air conditioning off each
time the vehicle is started. Last
Setting will resume the last setting
when the vehicle was shut off.
Press Air Conditioning Mode when
highlighted. Select Off, On, or Last
Setting. Press 4.
Auto Defog
This allows the auto defog to be
turned on or off.
Press Auto Defog when highlighted.
Select On or Off. Press 4.

5-31

Auto Rear Defog

Remote Start Auto Seat Cool

This allows the auto rear defog to
be turned on or off. This feature will
automatically turn on the rear
window defogger when it is cold
outside.

When on, this feature will turn the
cooled seats on when using the
remote start on hot days.

Press Auto Rear Defog when
highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.
Auto Cooled Vented Seats
When on, this feature will turn the
cooled seats on when using remote
start on warm days.
Press Auto Cooled Vented Seats
when highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.
Auto Heated Seats
When on, this feature will turn the
heated seats on.
Press Auto Heated Seats when
highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.

Press Remote Start Auto Seat Cool
when highlighted and open the
menu. Select On or Off. Press 4.
Remote Start Heated Seats
When on, this feature will turn the
heated seats on when using the
remote start on cold days.
Press Remote Start Heated Seats
when highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.

Cluster Display Info
Select the Cluster Display Info
menu and the following may be
displayed:
.

Cluster Eco Telltale

Cluster Eco Telltale
This allows eco telltale information
display to be turned on or off.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-32

Instruments and Controls

Press Cluster Eco Telltale when
highlighted. Select On or Off or turn.
Press 4.

Comfort and Convenience
Select the Comfort and
Convenience menu and the
following may be displayed:
.

Black plate (32,1)

Chime Volume

.

Easy Exit Steering Column

.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

.

Auto Parking Mirror Tilt

.

Personalization By Driver

.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

Easy Exit Steering Column
This allows the selection of the
Easy Exit Steering Column position
when exiting the vehicle.
Press Easy Exit Steering Column
when highlighted. Select Off,
On-Column In, On-Column Up,
On-Column In & Up. Press 4.
Easy Exit Driver Seat
This will move the seat back to
make it easier to exit the vehicle.
Press Easy Exit Driver Seat when
highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.

Chime Volume

Auto Parking Mirror Tilt

This allows selection of the chime
volume level.

This allows the selection of the
reverse tilt mirror feature on or off.
When on, both the driver and
passenger mirrors will tilt downward
when vehicle is shifted to
R (Reverse) to improve visibility of
the ground near the rear wheels.
They will return to their previous
driving position when the vehicle is

Press Chime Volume when
highlighted. Select Normal or High.
Press 4.

shifted out of R (Reverse), the
ignition is turned to OFF, or the
vehicle is left in reverse.
Press Auto Parking Mirror when
highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.
Personalization By Driver
This allows the Personalization by
Driver feature to be turned on or off.
Press Personalization By Driver
when highlighted and open the
menu. Select On or Off. Press 4.
Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear
This allows selection of the Auto
Wipe in Reverse Gear feature to be
turned on or off. When on, and the
front wipers are on, the rear window
wiper will turn on automatically
when the vehicle is shifted into
R♦(Reverse).
Press Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear
when highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (33,1)

Instruments and Controls
Collision/Detection Systems
Select the Collision/Detection
Systems menu and the following
may be displayed:
.

Park Assist

.

Towbar Attached

.

Side Blind Zone Alert

Park Assist
This allows the Ultrasonic Parking
Assist feature, audible only, to be
turned on or off.
Press Park Assist when highlighted.
Select On or Off. Press 4.
Towbar Attached
This allows the towbar feature to be
turned on or off .
Press Towbar Attached when
highlighted. Select Off, On,
or Towbar Attached. Press 4.
Side Blind Zone Alert
This allows the Side Blind Zone
Alert feature to be turned on or off.

5-33

Press Side Blind Zone Alert when
highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.

Press Exit Lighting when
highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.

Lighting

Power Door Locks

Select the Lighting menu and the
following may be displayed:

Select Power Door Locks and the
following may be displayed:

.

Vehicle Locator Lights

.

Auto Door Unlock

.

Exit Lighting

.

Auto Door Lock

Vehicle Locator Lights

.

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

This allows the vehicle locator lights
to be turned on or off. The vehicle
locator lights come on when
unlocking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter.

.

Delayed Door Lock

Press Vehicle Locator Lights when
highlighted. Select Off, 30 Sec, 60
Sec, or 120 Sec. Press 4.
Exit Lighting
This allows selection of how long
the exterior lamps stay on when
leaving the vehicle and it is dark
outside.

Auto Door Unlock
This allows selection of which of the
doors will automatically unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Press Auto Door Unlock when
highlighted. Select All Doors, Driver
Door, or Off. Press 4.
Auto Door Lock
This allows selection of which of the
doors will automatically lock when
the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-34

Black plate (34,1)

Instruments and Controls

Press Auto Door Lock when
highlighted. Select On or Off or turn.
Press 4.

Press Delayed Door Lock when
highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

Lock, Unlock Settings

When on, this feature will keep the
driver door from locking when the
door is open. If Off is selected, the
Delayed Door Lock menu will be
available and the door will lock as
programmed through this menu.

Select Lock, Unlock Settings and
the following may be displayed:

Press Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
when highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.
Delayed Door Lock
When on, this feature will delay the
locking of the doors until
five seconds after the last door is
closed. Three chimes will signal that
delayed locking is in use. Pressing
either Q orK on the RKE transmitter
twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately lock
all of the doors.

.

Passive Entry Unlock

.

Passive Entry Lock

.

Sliding Door Selection

.

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

.

Remote Lock Light & Horn
Feedback

.

Remote Door Unlock

.

Relock Remotely Unlocked
Doors

.

Relock Unlocked Doors

.

Memory Remote Recall

.

Remote Start

.

Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder

Passive Entry Lock
This feature can be turned on or off
or to select feedback when using
the button on the driver door to lock
the vehicle.
Press Passive Entry Lock when
highlighted. Select Off, On, or On
with Active Chirp. Press 4.
Passive Entry Unlock
This specifies of which doors are
unlocked by pressing the button on
the outside door handle.
Press Delayed Door Lock when
highlighted. Select All Doors or
Driver Door. Press 4.
Remote Unlock Light Feedback
When on, the exterior lamps will
flash when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
Press Remote Unlock Light
Feedback when highlighted. Select
Flash Lights or Lights Off. Press 4.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (35,1)

Instruments and Controls
Remote Lock Light & Horn
Feedback
This allows selection of what type of
feedback is given when pressing Q
on the RKE transmitter.
Press Remote Lock Light & Horn
Feedback when highlighted. Select
Lights only, Lights & Horn, horn
Only, or Off. Press 4.
Remote Door Unlock
This allows selection of which doors
will unlock when pressing K on the
RKE transmitter.
Press Remote Door Unlock when
highlighted. Select All Doors or
Driver Door. When set to Driver
Door Only, the driver door will
unlock the first time K is pressed
and all doors will unlock when the
button is pressed a second time.
When set to All Doors, all of the
doors will unlock at the first press of
K. Press 4.

Relock Remotely Unlocked Doors
When on, if the doors are unlocked
from the RKE transmitter and a door
is not opened after a period of time,
the doors will automatically relock.
Press Relock Remotely Unlocked
Doors when highlighted. Select On
or Off. Press 4.
Relock Unlocked Door
When on, the doors will
automatically lock after a period of
time not entering or exiting the
vehicle.
Press Relock Unlocked Door when
highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.
Memory Remote Recall
This allows the Memory Remote
Recall feature to be turned on or off.
When on, this feature will recall the
current driver's last seat, outside
mirrors upon unlocking the driver
door with the RKE, and opening that

5-35

door. The current driver is identified
when the RKE transmitter is used to
unlock the driver door.
Memory Remote Recall is when the
memorized settings will be recalled
when the vehicle is unlocked.
Press Memory Remote Recall when
highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.
Remote Start
This allows the remote start feature
to be turned on or off.
Press Remote Start when
highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.
Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder
This allows the Remote Left in
Vehicle Reminder feature to be
turned on or off. If on, the horn will
chirp if a remote is left in the
vehicle.
Press Remote Left in Vehicle
Reminder when highlighted. Select
On or Off. Press 4.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-36

Instruments and Controls

Rear Camera Option
Select Rear Camera Option and the
following may be displayed:
.

Black plate (36,1)

Guidelines

Guidelines
This feature will turn on the
guidelines in the rear camera
display.
Press Guidelines when highlighted.
Select On or Off. Press 4.

Vehicle Factory Settings
Select Vehicle Factory Settings to
return all of the vehicle
personalization to the default
settings. Press Vehicle Factory
Settings when highlighted. Select
Yes or No. Press 4.

Sport Mode Settings
Select Sport Mode Settings and the
following may be displayed:
.

Sport Suspension

.

Powertrain Performance

.

Sport Steering

All Wheel Drive Steering

.

All Wheel Drive Steering

.

Instrument Lighting

This feature will turn on the all
wheel drive steering feature.

Sport Suspension
This feature will turn on the sport
suspension feature.

Press All Wheel Drive Steering
when highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.

Press Sport Suspension when
highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.

Instrument Lighting

Powertrain Performance

Press Instrument Lighting when
highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.

This feature will turn on the
powertrain performance feature.
Press Powertrain Performance
when highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.

This feature will turn on the
instrument lighting feature.

Language
Select the Language menu and the
following may be displayed:

Sport Steering

.

English

This feature will turn on the sport
steering feature on.

.

French

.

Spanish

Press Sport Steering when
highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.

Press Language when highlighted.
Select the language desired.
Press 4.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (37,1)

Instruments and Controls

5-37

Text Scroll

Max Startup Volume

DivX VOD

This allows the Text Scroll feature to
be turned on or off.

This allows the startup volume of
the infotainment system to be set.

Press DivX VOD when highlighted.

When on, if there is long text
displayed on the audio screen, the
text is scrolled. When off, the text is
scrolled once and displayed in
truncated form.

Press Max Startup Volume when
highlighted. Press S or T select the
desired volume between 9-21.
Press 4.

Press Text Scroll when highlighted.
Select On or Off. Press 4.

About

Touch Beep Volume
This allows the Touch Beep Volume
feature to be turned on or off.
When on, a beep will be heard
when pressing the screen. When
off, the beep is canceled.
Press Touch Beep Volume when
highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4.

Select the About menu and the
following will be displayed:
.

System Version

.

Legal Information

System Version
Press System Version when
highlighted to view the version of
the infotainment system. Press 4.
Legal Information
Press Legal Information when
highlighted to view the Open source
information. Press 4.

.

DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital
video format created by DivX,
LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi
Corporation. This is an official
DivX Certified® device that plays
DivX video. See divx.com for
more information and software
tools on how to convert files into
DivX videos.

.

DIVX VIDEO-ON DEMAND: This
DivX Certified device must be
registered in order to play
purchased DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD)
movies. To obtain a registration
code, locate the DivX VOD
section in the device setup
menu. See vod.divx.com for
more information on how to
complete the registration.

Press

4.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

5-38

Black plate (38,1)

Instruments and Controls

2 NOTES

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (1,1)

Lighting

Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Lighting Features
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-5

Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls

6-1

; (Parking Lamps):

Turns on the
parking lamps, together with the
taillamps, license plate lamp, and
instrument panel lights.
OFF: Turns all the lamps off,
except the Daytime Running
Lamps♦(DRL).
The DRL automatically turn off when
the ignition key is turned off.

# : For vehicles with fog lamps,
press to turn the lamps on or off.
The exterior lamp control is on the
turn signal lever on the left side of
the steering column.
There are three positions:

3 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps, together with the
following:
.

Taillamps

.

License Plate Lamp

.

Instrument Panel Lights

.

Parking Lamps

Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when
the headlamps or parking lamps are
manually turned on and the ignition
is off and a door is open. To disable
the chime, turn the light off.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

6-2

Black plate (2,1)

Lighting

Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer

Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)

The headlamps must be on for this
feature to work.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.

Push the turn signal lever away
from you to turn the high beams on.
The 3 light comes on in the
instrument cluster while the high
beams are on and the ignition is
turned to ON/RUN.
Pull the lever toward you to return to
low beams.

The DRL system makes the
headlamps come on when the
following conditions are met:

The DRL system turns off when one
of the following conditions is met:
.

The ignition is off.

.

The parking brake is on.

.

The high-beam headlamps
are on.

.

The ignition is on.

.

The exterior lamp band is in
OFF or parking lamp position.

.

The low-beam headlamps
are on.

.

The parking brake is released.

.

The flash-to-pass feature
is used.

Flash-to-Pass
This feature is used to signal to the
vehicle ahead that you want
to pass.

When the DRL system is on, the
taillamps, sidemarker lamps,
parking lamps, and instrument panel
lights do not come on unless the
exterior lamp control is turned to the
parking lamp or headlamp position.

The regular headlamp system
should be used when needed.

Pull the turn signal lever toward you
until the high-beam headlamps
come on, then release the lever to
turn them off.
This indicator light in the center
stack display comes on when the
DRL system is on.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (3,1)

Lighting

Hazard Warning Flashers

Turn and Lane-Change
Signals

6-3

If after signaling a turn or a lane
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
may be burned out.
Replace any burned out bulbs. If a
bulb is not burned out, check the
fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 10‑28.

Fog Lamps

The hazard warning flasher button
is on the center stack.

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):
Press to make the front and rear
turn signal lamps flash on and off.
This warns others that you are
having trouble. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers
are on, the turn signals will
not work.

An arrow on the instrument cluster
flashes in the direction of the turn or
lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Hold it there until the lane
change is completed.
The lever returns to its starting
position whenever it is released.

For vehicles with fog lamps, they
are controlled by the # band on the
middle of the turn signal lever.
To use the fog lamps, the ignition
must be turned on and the
low-beam headlamps or parking
lamps must be on.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

6-4

Black plate (4,1)

Lighting

Turn the band to # to turn the fog
lamps on. The band automatically
returns to its starting position when
released. The fog lamp indicator
light comes on in the center of the
instrument panel. See Front Fog
Lamp Light on page 5‑20.

Interior Lighting

Courtesy Lamps

Instrument Panel
Illumination Control

The courtesy lamps come on
automatically when any door is
opened and the dome lamp is in the
DOOR position.

Dome Lamps

To turn the fog lamps off, turn the
band to # again. The fog lamp
indicator light will go off.
The fog lamps will also turn off
when the high-beam headlamps are
turned on. When the high-beam
headlamps are turned off, the fog
lamps will turn on again.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.

This feature controls the brightness
of the instrument panel controls and
infotainment display screen. The
thumbwheel is to the left of the
steering column on the instrument
panel.

D (Instrument Panel
Brightness): Move the
thumbwheel up or down to brighten
or dim the instrument panel controls
and infotainment display screen.

The dome lamp controls are in the
overhead console.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (5,1)

Lighting

6-5

Move the control to change the
lamp setting.

Lighting Features

Battery Power Protection

OFF: Turns the lamps off, even
when a door is open.

Exit Lighting

The battery saver feature is
designed to protect the vehicle's
battery.

DOOR: Turns the lamps on
automatically when a door is
opened.
ON: Turns on the dome lamps.

If the dome lamps are in the DOOR
position, they come on automatically
when the key is removed from the
ignition. The exterior lamps and
dome lamps remain on after the
door is closed for a set amount of
time, then automatically turn off.
To turn on the exterior lamps while
the ignition is off:
1. Open the drivers door.
2. Pull and release the turn lever.
The headlamps, parking lamps, and
back-up lamps will turn on for a set
amount of time, then automatically
turn off.
This feature can be changed. See
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑25.

If some interior lamps and/or
headlamps are left on and the
ignition is turned off, the battery
rundown protection system
automatically turns the lamp off after
some time.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

6-6

Black plate (6,1)

Lighting

2 NOTES

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (1,1)

Infotainment System

Infotainment
System
Introduction
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Home Page (Radio with
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Radio
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Audio Players
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

Navigation

OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Phone
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-20
Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Downloadable Applications
Smartphone Link
(Overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Smartphone Link
(Pandora) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Smartphone Link
(Stitcher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

Introduction
Infotainment
Determine which radio the vehicle
has and read the following pages to
become familiar with its features.

{ WARNING
Taking your eyes off the road for
extended periods could cause a
crash resulting in injury or death
to you or others. Do not give
extended attention to infotainment
tasks while driving.

Bluetooth Phone/Devices
Pictures and Movies (Audio
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Pictures and Movies (Picture
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Pictures and Movies (Movie
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Trademarks and License
Agreements
Trademarks and License
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

7-1

This system provides access to
many audio and non-audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
.

Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-2
.

Black plate (2,1)

Infotainment System

Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.

Overview
Radio Without Touchscreen

See Defensive Driving on page 9‑2.
Notice: Contact your dealer
before adding any equipment.
Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with
the operation of the engine, radio,
or other systems, and could
damage them. Follow federal
rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.

Theft-Deterrent Feature
The infotainment system has an
electronic security system installed
to prevent theft.
The infotainment system only works
in the vehicle in which it was first
installed, and cannot be used in
another vehicle.

1.

O /VOL (Power/Volume)
.

Press to turn the system on
and off.

.

Turn to adjust the volume.

2. PRESET Buttons 1−6
.

Press and hold to store a
station.

.

Press to go to a preset
favorite station.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (3,1)

Infotainment System
3. MENU/TUNE
.

Press to open menus and
select menu items.

.

Turn to highlight menu
items or to set values while
in a menu.

.

4.

Turn to manually select
radio stations.

7.

Press to go to a
favorite page.

.

.

.

Press and hold to reverse
through the currently
playing song on an external
audio device.
Press to access the
auxiliary input device.

9. RADIO/BAND
Press to select AM, FM,
or band.

.

Press to view current radio
station and current song
information.

6. SEEK

Press to seek the previous
station.

.

5. INFO (Information)
.

.

Press to select the radio
when listening to a different
audio source.

.

¨ (Next)

Press to seek the next
station.
Press and hold to fast
forward through the
currently playing song on
an external audio device.

12. CONFIG (Configuration)
.

13.

8. AUX (Auxiliary)

FAV 123 (Favorites)
.

© SEEK (Previous)

10.

H (Clock)
.

Press to enter the time
and date settings menu.

11. TONE
.

Press to open the
tone menu.

7-3

14.

Press to open the System
Configuration menu.

/ BACK
.

Press to go to the
previous screen.

.

Press to cancel entered
content.

5 /> (Phone/Mute)
.

Press to open the phone
main menu.

.

Press to mute the audio
system.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-4

Black plate (4,1)

Infotainment System

Home Page (Radio with
Touchscreen)

Radio With Touchscreen

Touchscreen Buttons
Touchscreen buttons show on the
screen when available. When a
function is unavailable, the button
may gray out. When a function is
selected, the button may highlight.

Home Page Features

1.

z VOL y (Volume)
.

2.

Press to decrease or
increase the volume.

O (Power)
.

Press and hold to turn the
power on or off.

3.

D (Home Page)
.

Press to go to the Home
Page. See Home Page
(Radio with Touchscreen)
on page 7‑4.

F to go to the Home Page.
e audio: Press to select AM, FM,
Press

SiriusXM (if equipped), USB/iPod/
Bluetooth Audio, or AUX.

G picture & movie:

Press to view
a picture, movie, or auxiliary video.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (5,1)

Infotainment System

7 telephone: Press to activate the
phone features (if equipped). See
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑20
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
on page 7‑21.
^ smartphone link:

Press to listen
to Pandora or Stitcher. See
Smartphone Link (Overview) on
page 7‑29 or Smartphone Link
(Pandora) on page 7‑31 or
Smartphone Link (Stitcher) on
page 7‑33.

Turning the System On or Off

O /VOL (Power/Volume):

Press to

turn the radio on and off.

Automatic Switch-Off
If the infotainment system has been
turned on after the ignition is turned
off, the system will turn off
automatically after 10 minutes.

Volume Control

Press to access the
Personalization menu. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑25.

Menu System
Controls
The MENU/TUNE knob and /
BACK button are used to navigate
the menu system.
Turn to:

Operation

The infotainment system is operated
by using the pushbuttons,
multifunction knobs, and menus
shown on the display.

Press and hold 5 /> to mute the
infotainment system. Press 5 />
again or turn the O /VOL knob to
cancel mute.

MENU/TUNE Knob:

8 settings:

Radio Controls Without
Touchscreen

7-5

.

Highlight a menu option.

.

Select a value.

Press to:

O /VOL (Power/Volume):

Turn to

adjust the volume.
Press 5 />
to activate OnStar. See OnStar®
System on page 7‑18.

.

Enter the menu system.

.

Select or activate the highlighted
menu option.

.

Confirm a set value.

.

Turn a system setting on or off.

5 /> (Phone/Mute):

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-6

Black plate (6,1)

Infotainment System

/ BACK:
Press to:

3. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to
select the desired tone.

.

Exit a menu.

4. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
adjust the desired tone.

.

Go back to the previous menu
screen.

5. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to
save the setting.

.

Delete the last character in a
sequence.

.

Press and hold to delete the
entire character sequence.

Press the / BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

.

Country

Press the / BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.

System Settings
Configuring the Number of
Favorite Pages
Up to six favorite pages can be
saved, and each page can store up
to six radio stations.
To configure the number of available
favorite pages:

Submenus

1. Press the TONE button.

An arrow on the right-hand edge of
the menu indicates that it has a
submenu with other options.

2. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob
to EQ.
3. Press the MENU/TUNE knob.

2. Select Radio Settings.

Audio Settings

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
select one of the following, then
press the MENU/TUNE knob to
select it.

3. Select Radio Favorites.

The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio
player source.

1. Press the CONFIG button.

4. Select the number of available
favorite pages to display.

.

OFF

.

Pop

5. Press the / BACK button to go
back to the System
Configuration menu.

1. Press the TONE button.

.

Rock

Auto Volume

2. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
the desired tone.

.

Classical

.

Talk

This feature automatically adjusts
the radio volume to compensate for
road and wind noise.

Adjusting the Bass, Midrange,
Treble, Fader, and Balance

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (7,1)

Infotainment System
The level of volume compensation
can be selected, or the feature can
be turned off.

Automatic Switch-Off

2. Select Radio Settings.

If the infotainment system has been
turned on after the ignition is turned
off, the system will turn off
automatically after 10 minutes.

3. Select Auto Volume.

Volume Control

4. Select the setting.

z VOL y (Volume):

1. Press the CONFIG button.

5. Press the / BACK button to go
back to the System
Configuration menu.

Radio Controls with
Touchscreen
The infotainment system is operated
by using the pushbuttons, menus
shown on the display, and steering
wheel controls.
Turning the System On or Off

O (Power): Press and hold to turn
the radio on and off.

Press to
increase or decrease the volume or
press the volume bar.

> (Mute): Press z VOL y, then
press > to mute and unmute the

7-7

The level of volume compensation
can be selected, or the feature can
be turned off.
1. Press

D.

2. Select Settings.
3. Select Radio Settings.
4. Select Auto Volume.
5. Select the setting by pressing
or T.

S

System Settings

6. Press the 4 BACK button to go
back to the System
Configuration menu.

Auto Volume

Audio Settings

This feature automatically adjusts
the radio volume to compensate for
road and wind noise.

The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio
player source.

system.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-8

Infotainment System

Tone Settings: Press menu, then
tone settings from the AM or
FM menu.
.

Black plate (8,1)

EQ (Equalizer): Press S or T to
select a sound style or turn off
the sound style.

Radio

Radio Broadcast Data
System (RBDS)

AM-FM Radio

RBDS is a service by FM stations
that makes it easier to find radio
stations with fault-free reception.

Playing the Radio without
Touchscreen
Audio Source Menu

Bass, Mid (Midrange), or Treble:
Press − or + to change the
desired sound style from −12
to +12.

O /VOL (Power/Volume): Press to
turn the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.

.

Fader or Balance: Adjust the
front/rear or left/right speakers.

MENU/TUNE: Turn to change the
radio station.

.

Reset: Restore the settings back
to default settings.

RADI /BAND: Press to select AM
and FM.

.

Press OK to exit Tone Settings.

INFO: Press to display additional
information that may be available for
the current song.
FAV 123: Press to open the
favorites list and select a
favorite page.
Preset Buttons 1–6: Press to
select preset stations.

RBDS stations are indicated by the
program name instead of the
broadcasting frequency.

View RBDS Broadcast
Information

Press the INFO button to view the
RBDS broadcasting information that
is being received.

Selecting a Band
Press the RADIO/BAND button to
choose AM or FM. The last station
that was playing starts playing
again.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (9,1)

Infotainment System

7-9

Selecting an Auxiliary Device

Favorites List

Stations List

Press the AUX button to select a
connected auxiliary device.

There are two ways to select a
station from the Favorites List.

Selecting a Station

.

1. From AM or FM, turn the MENU/
TUNE knob to select the
Stations List, then press to
select.

Seek Tuning
If the radio station is not known:
Press © SEEK¨ to automatically
search for available radio stations.
Press and hold © SEEK ¨ to change
the radio stations as desired, then
release to stop at the current
station. Press and hold to fast
forward or reverse through the
currently playing song on an
external audio device.

.

Continue pressing the FAV 123
button to select the desired
favorite preset page.
From AM or FM, turn the MENU/
TUNE knob to select the
Favorites List, then press to
select. The Favorites List
information will be displayed.
Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
move to the desired station from
the Favorites List , then press to
receive the station.

2. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
move to the desired station from
the Stations List , then press to
receive the station.
Category List

Most stations that broadcast an
RDS program type code specify the
type of programming transmitted.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-10

Black plate (10,1)

Infotainment System

Some stations change the program
type code depending on the
content. The system stores the RDS
stations sorted by program type in
the FM category list.
To search for a programming type
determined by station:
1. From FM, turn the MENU/TUNE
knob to select FM Category List,
then press the MENU/
TUNE knob.
2. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
move to the desired station, then
press the MENU TUNE knob to
receive the selected
broadcasting channel.
Update Stations List

From AM or FM, turn the MENU/
TUNE knob to select the Update AM
or FM Stations List, then press the
MENU/TUNE knob.

Playing the Radio with
Touchscreen
Audio Source Menu

z VOL y (Volume): Press to

During the AM or FM broadcasting
list update, press the MENU/TUNE
knob or / BACK button to stop the
updates.

O (Power): Press and hold to turn
the system on and off.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

D (Home Page):

Stations from all bands can be
stored in any order in the favorite
pages.

RDS (Radio Data System)

Up to six stations can be stored in
each favorite page.
Storing Stations
Press the FAV 123 button to select
the desired page of saved favorites.
To store the station to a position in
the list, press the corresponding
preset button 1−6 until a beep is
heard.

increase or decrease the volume.

Press to enter

the Home Page.
The radio may have RDS. The RDS
feature is available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This feature only works
when the information from the radio
station is available. In rare cases, a
radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the
radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio
station.
While the radio is tuned to an
FM-RDS station, the station name
or call letters display.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (11,1)

Infotainment System
Selecting a Band

Selecting a Station

Press D, audio, then Source R to
choose AM, FM, or SiriusXM®,
if equipped. The last station that
was playing starts playing again.

Seek Tuning

Selecting an Auxiliary Device

If the radio station is not known:
Press g SEEK l to automatically
search for available radio stations.

.

7-11

Press Q or R to scroll through
the list. Press on the station to
select it.

Station List

Hold and drag to the left or right of
the radio station to automatically
search for available radio stations.
Manual Tuning
Continue pressing q TUNE r to
manually change the radio station.
Favorite List

Connect the auxiliary device to the
AUX input terminal. Play will begin
when the system has finished
reading the information on the
device.
If the storage device is already
connected, press D, audio, Source
R, select AUX from the drop
down menu.

.

From the AM or FM menu, press
AM or FM station list on the
screen.

.

Press Q or R to scroll through
the list. Press on the station to
select it.

Category List

.

From the AM or FM menu, press
favorite list on the screen.

.

From the FM menu, press FM
category list on the screen.

.

Press Q or R to scroll through
the list. Press on the station to
select it.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-12

Black plate (12,1)

Infotainment System

Update Station List

.

From the AM or FM menu, press
update AM or FM station list on
the screen. The broadcasting list
updating will begin.

.

During the AM or FM
broadcasting list update, press
Cancel to stop the updates.

Storing a Station as a Favorite
Stations from all bands can be
stored in any order in the favorite
pages.
Up to five stations can be stored in
each of the seven favorites pages.

Storing Stations

Satellite Radio

To store the station to a position in
the list, press the corresponding
button 1−5 until a beep is heard.
1. Select the desired station.

Vehicles with a SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM
Satellite subscription can receive
SiriusXM programming.

2. Press S or T to select the
desired page of saved favorites.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Service

3. Hold down any of the preset
buttons to save the current radio
station to that button of the
selected favorites page.

SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
based in the 48 contiguous United
States and 10 Canadian provinces.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a wide
variety of programming and
commercial-free music, coast to
coast, and in digital-quality sound.
A service fee is required to receive
the SiriusXM service. For more
information, contact SiriusXM at
www.siriusxm.com or
1-866-635-2349 (U.S.), and
www.xmradio.ca or 1-877-209-0079
(Canada).

To change a preset button, tune to
the new desired radio station and
hold the button.

Listening to SiriusXM Radio
1. Press

D.

2. Press audio.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (13,1)

Infotainment System
3. Press Source

R.

Using the Preset Buttons

7-13

Using the SiriusXM Menu
Operation

4. From the drop-down menu,
press XM and the most recent
listened to SiriusXM channel will
display.

1. Press MENU on the XM radio
screen.

Press 4 to return to the
HOME menu.

Selecting a Category
Continue pressing q Category r
and the previous or next category
will be selected.

Selecting a Channel
Press q Channel r and the
previous or next channel will be
selected within the same category.
Press and hold q Channel r to
jump four channels backward or
forward in the same category, then
release the button at the desired
channel.

Up to seven favorites pages can be
saved, and each page can store up
to five channels.
To change a preset button, tune to
the new desired channel and hold
the button.
Listening to Preset Channels
1. Continue pressing
select the desired
favorites page.

S or T to

2. Press the preset button to listen
to the channel saved to that
button.

2. Press the menu to select the
desired item or to display the
detail menu item.
3. Press 4 to return to the
previous menu.
Favorite List
1. Press favorite list from the XM
menu. The favorite list
information is displayed.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-14

Black plate (14,1)

Infotainment System

2. Press Q or R to find the desired
station. Tune to the station by
selecting it.
Channel List
1. Press XM channel list from the
XM menu. The channel list is
displayed.

3. Press OK.

FM

Tone Settings

FM signals only reach about 16 to
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
that automatically works to reduce
interference, some static can occur,
especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in
and out.

From the tone settings menu, the
sound features can be set up for
SiriusXM audio and each audio
player’s functions.

2. Press Q or R to find the desired
channel. Tune to the channel by
selecting it.

1. Press the tone settings from the
XM menu. The tone settings
screen is displayed. See “Tone
Settings” under Operation on
page 7‑5.

Category List

2. Press OK.

1. Press XM category list from the
XM menu. The category list is
displayed.

Radio Reception

2. Press Q or R to find the desired
category. Tune to the category
by selecting it.
Direct Access
1. Press direct access from the XM
menu. The direct access screen
is displayed.
2. Press the channel number to
tune to the desired channel.

Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as mobile
phone chargers, vehicle
convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are
plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or
static, unplug the item from the
accessory power outlet.

AM
The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with
each other. Static can occur when
things like storms and power lines
interfere with radio reception. When
this happens, try reducing the treble
on the radio.

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
Service
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
gives digital radio reception from
coast to coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just
as with FM, tall buildings or hills can

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (15,1)

Infotainment System
interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and
out. In addition, traveling or standing
under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of the SiriusXM signal for a period
of time.

Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage can cause
interference with the vehicle's radio.

Multi-Band Antenna
The multi-band antenna is on the
roof of the vehicle. The antenna is
used for the AM-FM radio, OnStar,
the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
System, and GPS (Global
Positioning System), if the vehicle
has these features. Keep the
antenna clear of obstructions for
clear reception.

Audio Players
USB Port
Using the USB Port
The infotainment system can play
music or movies by connecting an
auxiliary device to the USB port,
if equipped.
USB Support
The USB connector is in the center
console, and uses the USB 2.0
standard.
USB Supported Devices

7-15

Make sure the iPod has the latest
firmware from Apple® for proper
operation. iPod firmware can be
updated using the latest iTunes®
application. See www.apple.com/
itunes.
For help with identifying your iPod,
go to www.apple.com/support.
The USB port can play both lower
and upper case .mp3, .wma, .ogg,
and .wav files stored on a USB
storage device.
USB Supported File and Folder
Structure
The Infotainment system supports:

.

USB Flash Drives

.

Up to 2,500 folders.

.

Portable USB Hard Drives

.

Up to 10 folders in depth.

.

2G-5G iPod nano®

.

Up to 2,500 music files.

.

1G-3G iPod touch®

.

Up to 2,500 photo files.

.

120GB/160GB iPod classic®

.

Up to 250 movie files.

.

3G/3GS/4/4S iPhone®

.

ID3 Tag (versions 1.0/1.1/2.2/
2.3/2.4).

.

FAT16.

Not all iPods and USB drives are
compatible with the USB port.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-16

Black plate (16,1)

Infotainment System

.

FAT32.

.

exFAT.

Connecting a USB Storage
Device or iPod/iPhone
To connect a USB storage device,
connect the device to the USB port.
To connect an iPod/iPhone, connect
one end of the device’s cable to the
iPod/iPhone and the other end to
the USB port.
The iPod/iPhone charges while it is
connected to the vehicle if the
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN position. When the
vehicle is turned off, the iPod/
iPhone automatically powers off and
will not charge or draw power from
the vehicle's battery.
For more information on USB
usage, see “Audio System” in
Pictures and Movies (Audio System)
on page 7‑34 or Pictures and
Movies (Picture System) on
page 7‑39 or Pictures and Movies
(Movie System) on page 7‑40.

Auxiliary Devices
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Settings menus and functions may
vary depending on vehicle options.
The auxiliary input jack in the center
stack can be used to connect
external audio devices such as an
iPod®, iPhone®, MP3 player, CD
player, and other supported devices
for use as another source for audio
listening. This input jack is not an
audio output; do not plug
headphones into the front auxiliary
input jack.

Use the O /VOL knob to adjust the
volume.

Radio with Touchscreen
The infotainment system can play
music or movies connected by the
auxiliary device.
Play will begin when the system has
finished reading the information on
the device.
Playing Music

Radio without Touchscreen
To use a portable device, connect
the device with a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
cable to the auxiliary input jack. The
radio will automatically switch to the
device if the radio is on.
When a device is already
connected, press the AUX button to
begin playing the device.

To play the music from the device,
if the device is already connected:
1. Press

D.

2. Press audio.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (17,1)

Infotainment System
3. Press Source

R.

Using the AUX Movie Menu

4. Press AUX/USB.
To adjust the tone settings, see
“Tone Settings” under “Radio
Controls with Touchscreen” in
Operation on page 7‑5.

2. Press the desired menu.
.

tone settings: Adjust the
sound setup. See “Tone
Settings” under “Radio
Controls with Touchscreen”
in Operation on page 7‑5.

.

clock/temp display: To
display the clock and
temperature on the full
screen, select On or Off.

.

display settings: Adjust the
brightness and contrast of
the screen.

Playing Movies
Movies are not available while
driving.
If the USB storage device is already
connected:
1. Press

D.

2. Press picture and movie.
3. Press Source

R.

4. Press USB (Movie).
For iPod/iPhone, connect the iPod/
iPhone to the AUX input terminal by
using the AUX cable for iPod/
iPhone to play movie files.

1. Press MENU from the AUX
movie screen. The AUX menu is
displayed.

7-17

3. Press

4.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-18

Black plate (18,1)

Infotainment System

Navigation

OnStar Buttons

Hands-Free Calling

OnStar® System

X:
.

Make a call, end a call,
or answer an incoming call.

Press X to make a call, end a call,
and answer an incoming call.

.

Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.

.

Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Navigation voice commands.
Requires the available Directions
and Connections service plan.

If equipped, this vehicle has a
comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live Advisor
for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
Connection, and Diagnostic
Services.
For safety, some features are
disabled while the vehicle is in
motion.
Control Panel Overview

Press to speak to an Advisor.

Press X to give OnStar Hands-Free
Calling voice commands.
Press X to give OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation voice
commands for automated directions.
.

Press 1 to hide the
Turn-by-Turn Navigation screen.
When the route is changed, the
Turn-by-Turn Navigation screen
is displayed. The Turn-by-Turn
Navigation screen is only
displayed on the AM/FM/XM
radio mode and AUX/USB/
iPod mode.

.

Press $ to mute the
Turn-by-Turn Navigation voice
guidance.

Q : Press to connect to an
Advisor.
.

Verify account information or
update contact information.

The OnStar system status light is
next to the OnStar buttons. If the
status light is:

.

Get driving directions. Requires
the available Directions and
Connections service plan.

.

Solid Green: System is ready.

.

.

Flashing Green: On a call.

.

Red: Indicates a problem.

Receive On-Demand
Diagnostics for a check on the
vehicle’s key operating systems.

.

Receive Roadside Assistance.

OnStar Light

]:

Press to connect to an
Emergency Advisor.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (19,1)

Infotainment System
.

Press q to move to the
navigation settings menu.
‐ Press update route to update
the route, then press Yes.
Press Cancel route to cancel it
or No to not update the route.
‐ Press cancel route to cancel
the route, then press Yes. The
navigation settings menu
disappears and the
Turn-by-Turn Navigation voice
guidance is shut down.
‐ Press my destination to check
the destination. The
destination name and
remaining distance to
destination are displayed on
the screen for about
five seconds. Then the current
Turn-by-Turn Navigation
information is displayed.
‐ Press route preview to preview
the route. The distance
information among turns from
current position to destination
can be checked. Check the
distance information by

pressing Q or R. If there is no
operation for about
five seconds, the current
Turn-by-Turn Navigation
information is displayed.
‐ Press repeat to repeat the
Turn-by-Turn Navigation voice
guidance.
‐ While the route is calculating,
the Cancel route menu is only
activated.
Blue OnStar
Press Q to be connected to a
specially trained OnStar Advisor
who can verify account information
and answer questions about the
system.
Emergency
With Automatic Crash Response,
the built-in system can automatically
connect to help in a crash even if
you cannot ask for it.

7-19

Press ] to connect to an
Emergency Advisor. GPS
technology is used to identify the
vehicle location and can provide
critical information to emergency
personnel. The Advisor is also
trained to offer critical assistance in
emergency situations.
OnStar SMS
When the Short Message Service
(SMS) is received by the vehicle, a
pop-up screen with the message is
displayed.
OnStar Welcome
When the user joins and operates
the OnStar service for the first time,
the pop-up screen “Get OnStar
started now please push the blue
button” is displayed.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-20

Black plate (20,1)

Infotainment System
duplicate or rarely used entries.
If possible, program speed dial
or other shortcuts.

Phone
Bluetooth (Overview)
For vehicles equipped with
Bluetooth® capability, the system
can interact with many Bluetooth
phones, PDAs, or other devices to:
.

Place and receive hands-free
calls.

.

Transmit hands-free data.

.

Play audio streaming files.

The device most be paired first. See
“Pairing” in Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls) Bluetooth (Overview) on
page 7‑20 or Bluetooth
(Infotainment Controls) on
page 7‑21.
To minimize driver distraction,
before driving, and with the vehicle
parked:
.

Become familiar with the
features of the cell phone.
Organize the phone book and
contact lists clearly and delete

.

Review the controls and
operation of the infotainment
system.

.

Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
The system may not work with
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in
this section.

.

See “Storing and Deleting Phone
Numbers” in this section.

{ WARNING
When using a cell phone, it can
be distracting to look too long or
too often at the screen of the
phone or the infotainment
(navigation) system. Taking your
eyes off the road too long or too
often could cause a crash
resulting in injury or death. Focus
your attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
can use a Bluetooth-capable cell
phone with a Hands-Free Profile to
make and receive phone calls. The
infotainment system is used to
control the system. The system can
be used while in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY. Not all phones
support all functions and not all
phones work with the Bluetooth
system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth
for more information about
compatible phones.
There may be restrictions on using
Bluetooth wireless technology in
some locations.
Due to the variety of Bluetooth
devices and their firmware versions,
the device may respond differently
when performing over Bluetooth.
Refer to the cell phone
manufacturer’s user guide for
questions about the phone's
Bluetooth functionality.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (21,1)

Infotainment System
Bluetooth Controls
For vehicles equipped with
Bluetooth capability, use the buttons
on the infotainment system and the
steering wheel to operate the
system.
Steering Wheel Controls

5 /g (Push to Talk):

Press to
interact with Bluetooth or OnStar,
if equipped. See Bluetooth
(Overview) on page 7‑20 or
Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) on
page 7‑21 or OnStar® System on
page 7‑18.

> /R (Mute/End Call):

Press to
silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar or
Bluetooth systems, press to reject
an incoming call, or end a
current call.
+ or − x : Press to increase or
decrease the volume.

Audio System

¦ SEEK or SEEK ¥ (Next/
Previous): Press to go to the next
or previous radio station, song on
an iPod, or file on a USB device (if
equipped).

When using the Bluetooth system,
sound comes through the vehicle's
front audio system speakers and
overrides the audio system. Use the
volume bar during a call to change
the volume level. The adjusted
volume level remains in memory for
later calls. The system maintains a
minimum volume level.

7-21

Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls)
To use infotainment controls to
access the menu system, see
Overview on page 7‑2.

Pairing
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
must be paired to the Bluetooth
system and then connected to the
vehicle before it can be used. See
your cell phone manufacturer's user
guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
phone is not connected, calls will be
made using OnStar Hands-Free
Calling, if available. See OnStar®
System on page 7‑18.
Pairing Information
.

A Bluetooth phone with MP3
capability cannot be paired to
the vehicle as a phone and an
MP3 player at the same time.

.

Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-22

Infotainment System

.

The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.

.

Pairing only needs to be
completed once, unless the
pairing information on the cell
phone changes or the cell phone
is deleted from the system.

.

.

Black plate (22,1)

Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.

according to the type of the phone.
In this case, proceed with the
phonebook download on phone.

5. Press Yes on the pop-up screen
of the Bluetooth device and
infotainment system.

Pairing a Phone

6. When the Bluetooth device and
infotainment system are
successfully paired, the
telephone screen is displayed on
the infotainment system.

When there is no paired device on
the infotainment system and the
Simple Secure Pairing (SSP) is
supported:
1. Press

D.

If multiple paired cell phones are
within range of the system, the
system connects to the first
available paired cell phone in the
order that they were first paired
to the system. To link to a
different paired phone, see
“Linking to a Different Phone”
later in this section.

When the Bluetooth device and
infotainment system are
successfully paired, the phone book
is downloaded automatically.
However, the phone book may not
be downloaded automatically

Pairing a Phone
When a paired device is on the
infotainment system and the SSP is
supported:
1. Press

D.

2. Press telephone, then
press Yes.
3. Press Search Bluetooth Device.
4. Press the desired device to pair
on the searched list screen.

2. Press settings.
3. Press connection settings.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (23,1)

Infotainment System
4. Press bluetooth settings.

Pairing a Phone

5. Press pair device.

When there is no paired device on
the infotainment system and the
SSP is not supported:

6. Press Search Bluetooth Device.
7. Press the desired device to pair
on the searched list screen.

1. Press

D.

8. Press Yes on the pop-up screen
of the Bluetooth device and
infotainment system.

7-23

successfully paired, the
telephone screen is displayed on
the infotainment system.
When the connection fails, a failure
message is displayed on the
infotainment system.
If a Bluetooth device was previously
connected, the infotainment system
executes the auto connection.
However, if the Bluetooth setting on
the Bluetooth device is turned off, a
failure message is displayed on the
infotainment system.

9. When the Bluetooth device and
infotainment system are
successfully paired, the 5 7 is
displayed on the "pair device"
screen.

Pairing a Phone

.

The connected phone is
highlighted by 5.

.

The 5 7 indicates the
hands-free and phone music
function are enabled.

3. Press Search Bluetooth Device.

.

The 7 indicates only hands-free
function is enabled.

.

The 5 indicates only Bluetooth
music is enabled.

5. Input the PIN code (default:
1234) to the Bluetooth device.
When the Bluetooth device and
infotainment system are

2. Press telephone, then
press Yes.
4. Press the desired device to pair
on the searched list screen.

When a paired device is on the
infotainment system and the SSP is
not supported:
1. Press

D.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-24

Black plate (24,1)

Infotainment System
.

The 5 7 indicates the
hands-free and phone music
function are enabled.

5. Press pair device.
6. The paired device will show with
5 7 when connected.

.

The 7 indicates only hands-free
function is enabled.

Disconnecting the Bluetooth
Device

.

The 5 indicates only Bluetooth
music is enabled.

1. Press

D.

2. Select settings.

2. Press settings.

Connecting a Bluetooth Device

3. Press connection settings.

1. Press

4. Press bluetooth settings.

2. Select settings.

5. Press pair device.

5. Press pair device.

3. Press connection settings.

6. Press Search Bluetooth Device.

4. Press bluetooth settings.

6. Press the name of the device to
be disconnected.

7. Press the desired device to pair
on the searched list screen.

5. Press pair device.

7. Press OK.

6. Press the device to be paired.

Deleting a Paired Phone

7. Press OK.

1. Press

Checking the Bluetooth
Connection

2. Select settings.

8. Input the PIN code (default:
1234) to the Bluetooth device.
When the Bluetooth device and
infotainment system are
successfully paired, 5 7 is
displayed on the pair device
screen.
.

The connected phone is
highlighted by 5.

1. Press

D.

D.

3. Press connection settings.
4. Press bluetooth settings.

D.

3. Press connection settings.
4. Press bluetooth settings.

2. Select settings.

5. Press pair device.

3. Press connection settings.

6. Press Delete.

4. Press bluetooth settings.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (25,1)

Infotainment System
7. Press Yes.

Bluetooth music, connect the
Bluetooth phone to the
infotainment system.

Bluetooth Music
Before playing Bluetooth music,
read the follow information.
.

A cell phone or Bluetooth device
that supports Advanced Audio
Distribution Profile (A2DP)
versions over 1.2 must be
registered and connected to the
product.

.

From the cell phone or Bluetooth
device, find the Bluetooth device
type to set/connect the item as a
stereo headset.

.

5 will appear on the screen if
the stereo headset is
successfully connected.

.

The sound played by the
Bluetooth device is delivered
through the infotainment system.

.

.

Bluetooth music can be played
only when a Bluetooth device
has been connected. To play

.

If the Bluetooth device is
disconnected while playing
phone music, the music is
discontinued. The audio
streaming function may not be
supported in some Bluetooth
phones. Only one function can
be used at a time between the
Bluetooth hands-free or Phone
music function. For example,
if you convert to the Bluetooth
hands-free while playing Phone
music, the music is
discontinued. Playing music from
the car is not possible when
there are no music files stored in
the cell phone.
For Bluetooth music to play, the
music must be played at least
once from the music player
mode of the cell phone or
Bluetooth device after
connecting as a stereo headset.
After being played at least once,
the music player will

7-25

automatically play upon entering
play mode, and it will
automatically stop when the
music player mode ends. If the
cell phone or Bluetooth device is
not in the waiting screen mode,
some devices may not
automatically play in Bluetooth
music play mode.
Playing Bluetooth Music
1. Press

D.

2. Press audio.
3. Press source

R.

4. Press Bluetooth, then select the
connected Bluetooth music
play mode.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-26

Black plate (26,1)

Infotainment System

Pause

Playing a File Randomly

r j to pause.
Press r j again to resume.

Press

Press

Skipping the Previous or Next File
Press g or l to select the
previous or next file.
Search
Press and hold g or
forward or rewind.

l to fast

Playing a File Repeatedly
Press
.

.

ALL: Plays all files repeatedly.

.

OFF: Returns to normal
playback.

This function may not be supported
depending on the cell phone.

u during playback.

.

NO: Plays all files repeatedly.

.

OFF: Returns to normal
playback.

.

Do not change the track too quickly
when playing Bluetooth music.

If the Bluetooth music playback
is not functioning, then check to
see if the cell phone is in the
waiting screen mode.

.

Conditions that may occur when
playing Bluetooth music:

Sounds may be cut off during
the Bluetooth music playback.

.

The infotainment system outputs
the audio from the cell phone or
Bluetooth device as it is
transmitted.

This function may not be supported
depending on the cell phone.

.

It takes some time to transmit
data from the cell phone to the
infotainment system.

.

If the cell phone or Bluetooth
device is not in the waiting
screen mode, it may not
automatically play despite being
carried out from the Bluetooth
music play mode.

.

The infotainment system
transmits the order to play from
the cell phone in the Bluetooth
music play mode. If this is done

v during playback.

1: Plays the current file
repeatedly.

in a different mode, then the
device transmits the order to
stop. Depending on the cell
phone’s options, this order to
play/stop may take time to
activate.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (27,1)

Infotainment System

Hands-Free Phone
General Information Without
Touchscreen

7-27

system. Not all phones support all
functions and not all phones work
with the Hands-Free Phone system.

> /R (Mute/End Call): Press to
end a call, decline a call, or cancel
an operation.

Hands-Free Phone Controls

Making a Call by Entering a Phone
Number

Use the buttons on the infotainment
system and the steering wheel to
operate the Hands-Free Phone
system.
Steering Wheel Controls
To use the hands-free phone on
vehicles without a touchscreen
radio, press 5 >, select Onstar
Hands-free Calling, then enter the
desired number.

General Information With
Touchscreen
Vehicles with a Hands-Free Phone
system can use a Bluetooth-capable
cell phone with a hands-free profile
to make and receive phone calls.
The infotainment system and voice
control are used to operate the

Steering wheel controls can be
used to:
.

Answer incoming calls.

.

Confirm system information.

.

End a call.

.

Decline a call.

.

Cancel an operation.

.

Make outgoing calls using the
call list.

5 /g (Push to Talk):

Press to
answer incoming calls and to
confirm system information. Press
and hold for two to three seconds to
access the call list.

1. Enter the phone number using
the keypad on the telephone
screen.
2. Press 5 on the screen or 5 /g
on the steering wheel controls.
If a wrong number is entered, press
} to delete the number one digit at
a time, or press and hold } to
delete all digits of the number.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-28

Infotainment System

Switching a Call to the Cell Phone
(Private Mode)
To switch the call from the cell
phone to hands-free:

0.
Press 0 again to switch back to

1. Press
2.

hands-free.
Turning the Microphone On
and Off
Press
or off.

Black plate (28,1)

3 to turn the microphone on

Taking calls
When a phone call comes through
the connected Bluetooth cell phone,
the playing track will be cut off and
the phone will ring with the relevant
information displayed.

4. Select the phone book entry
to call.

To decline the call, press > /R on
the steering wheel controls or press
Reject on the screen.

When the Bluetooth device and
infotainment system are
successfully paired, the phone book
will download. Some phones may
not download automatically. If this
happens, connect it again or
proceed with the phone book
download on the phone.

Using the Phone Book Menu

To call by using redial:

1. Press Phone Book on the
telephone screen.

.

Press 5 /g on the steering
wheel controls to display the
redial guidance screen.
Press and hold 5 on the
telephone screen.

Redialing is not possible when there
is no call history.

3. Use the keypad to input the
name to search. For details,
refer to the “Searching for a
Name” later in this section.

Press 5 /g on the steering wheel
controls or press Accept on the
screen.

Calling by Redial
.

2. Press 9 on the phone book
screen.

2. Press Q or
the list.

R to scroll through

3. Select the phone book entry
to call.
4. Press the number to dial.
Searching for Phone Book Entries
1. Press Phone Book on the
telephone screen.

5. Press the number to dial.

Searching for a Name
Select characters by using the
keypad on the phone book screen.
As characters are selected, the
names that include those characters
will display on the phone book
screen. As more characters of the
name are entered, the list of
possible names is shortened.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (29,1)

Infotainment System
To search for the name Alex:
1. Press (abc) to select the first
character.
2. Press (jkl) to select the second
character.
3. Press (def) to select the third
character.
4. Press (wxy) to select the fourth
character.
Making a Call from Call History
1. Press Call History on the
telephone screen.
2. Press one of the following for:
.
.
.

2 Dialed calls.
4 Missed calls.
9 Received calls.

3. Select the phone book entry
to call.

Making a Call with Speed Dial
Numbers
Press and hold the speed dial
number using the keypad on the
telephone screen.
Only speed dial numbers already
stored on the cell phone can be
used for speed dial calls. Up to
two-digit speed dial numbers are
supported.
For two-digit speed dial numbers,
press and hold the second digit to
make a call to the speed dial
number.

7-29

Downloadable
Applications
Smartphone Link
(Overview)
Before Using Smartphone link
If equipped, the vehicle can connect
to Pandora® and Stitcher
SmartRadio™ through the
infotainment system. The
applications most be downloaded to
the device first.
Pandora® is a free Internet radio
service that streams personalized
radio stations based on artists,
songs, genres, and comedians.
Create stations using the Pandora
website or smartphone application,
then use - (thumbs up) or ,
(thumbs down) to personalize
stations. To set up an account, or for
more information, go to
www.pandora.com. Pandora may
not be available in Canada or
Mexico.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-30

Black plate (30,1)

Infotainment System

Stitcher SmartRadio is an Internet
radio service that streams news,
sports, and entertainment shows
through the audio system. Create
personalized, on-demand stations or
discover new shows through
Stitcher's preset stations. To set up
an account, download the
application from the Android Market
or iTunes Store, or go to
www.stitcher.com.
A phone or tablet with Internet
connection and the Pandora and/or
Stitcher application installed is
required. Personal cell phone data
plans are used. Make sure the latest
version is installed on the device
and the volume is turned up.
Supported Smartphone
Applications

.

Stitcher
.

iPod/iPhone, through the USB
connection.

.

Android phone, through
Bluetooth wireless.

iPod®/iPhone®, through the
USB connection.

.

Android™ phone, through
Bluetooth® wireless.

iOS Version Error
If the iOS version of the iPhone is
less than 4.0, the error message is
displayed as, “Your iPhone does
not allow this application to be
opened on a USB connection.
Please refer to owner’s manual.”
.

iPod/iPhone Error Messages and
Solution
If the infotainment system fails to
activate the application on your
iPod/iPhone connected through the
USB port, the error message is
displayed as, “Unable to start
application, possible reasons.”

Activate the application on your
iPhone, then press the desired
application menu on the
infotainment system.

Connecting Application Error
If the infotainment system fails to
activate the application on the
smartphone connected through
Bluetooth wireless technology, the
error message is displayed as,
“Connecting application error.”

.

Your iPhone is locked. To
resolve, unlock the iPhone.

.

You have another active
application open. To resolve,
close the other active
application.

.

Reset all settings related to the
phone, then press the desired
application menu on the
infotainment system.

.

You have not installed the
application on your iPhone. To
resolve, install the application on
the iPhone.

.

Reconnect the smartphone and
Infotainment system through
Bluetooth wireless technology,

Pandora
.

On a BlackBerry® phone,
through Bluetooth wireless.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (31,1)

Infotainment System

.

Press iPhone or bluetooth phone
on the smartphone list menu to
switch to the desired device.

then press the desired
application menu on the
infotainment system.

.

When the application is stopped
on the smartphone, it usually
takes time to return to normal
operation. Try to activate the
application after 10–20 seconds.

Displaying or Hiding Application
Icons

To switch between Stitcher or
Pandora while playing the other on
the iPod/iPhone connected through
the USB port, press the D button of
the iPod/iPhone, then press Stitcher
or Pandora on the smartphone link
menu of the infotainment system.

To display or hide application icons
on the smartphone link menu:
1. Press

D.

2. Press smartphone link.

If the activated application is on the
smartphone link menu, the ^ is
activated in the upper position of the
HOME menu or playing screen.

Smartphone Link
(Pandora)
Some images and explanations may
vary by phone operating systems,
versions, and/or application (App)
versions.
Using Pandora®
1. Install the Pandora application
on the smartphone.

Switching Between a USB
Connected Device and a
Bluetooth Device
When the iPhone is connected to
the infotainment system through the
USB port, and the infotainment
system is connected to another
phone through Bluetooth wireless
technology, it is possible to switch
between the two applications, using
the smartphone list menu.

7-31

2. Connect the smartphone to the
infotainment system through the
USB port or Bluetooth wireless
technology.
3. Press SETTINGS.

.

iPhone: USB connection

4. Press the desired application
icon to hide or display it on the
smartphone link screen.

.

Android phone/BlackBerry
phone: Bluetooth wireless
technology

5. Press OK.

3. Activate the Pandora application.
4. Press

D.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-32

Black plate (32,1)

Infotainment System

5. Press smartphone link.

Changing Tracks

6. Press Pandora.

Press
track.

l to change to the next

Bookmark
To bookmark a favorite artist or
track.
1. Press

S on the screen.

2. Press Artist or Track.
Pandora Menus
7. Press Pandora.
If the smartphone is not connected
to the infotainment system or the
application is not installed on the
smartphone, the Pandora menu is
not activated.
Thumbs Up and Thumbs Down
Rate tracks by using - (thumbs up)
or , (thumbs down).
Pause
.
.

j to pause.
Press r to resume.
Press

Creating Stations by Searching
by Artist or Track
1. Press MENU. The Pandora
menu is displayed.
2. Press create station.
3. Press enter artist/track. The
keypad is displayed.
4. Enter the artist or track name
using the keypad, and then
press Create.

Creating Stations from Currently
Playing Music

5. Press the desired station. The
station is added into the
Pandora menu automatically.

1. Press MENU. The Pandora
menu is displayed.

Listening to Stations

2. Press create station.
3. Press from currently playing.
4. Press Artist or Track.
5. Press the desired station. The
station is added into the
Pandora menu automatically.

1. Press MENU. The Pandora
menu is displayed.
2. Press Q or R to scroll through
the list. Select the desired
station.
QuickMix
1. Press MENU. The Pandora
menu is displayed.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (33,1)

Infotainment System
2. Press QuickMix Z to listen to a
selection of tracks from your
stations.
Tone Settings
1. Press MENU. The Pandora
menu is displayed.

2. Connect the smartphone to the
infotainment system through the
USB port or Bluetooth wireless
technology.
.

iPhone: USB connection

.

Android phone/BlackBerry
phone: Bluetooth wireless
technology

2. Press tone settings. The tone
settings menu is displayed. See
“Tone Settings” under “Radio
Controls With Touchscreen” in
Operation on page 7‑5.

3. Activate the Stitcher application.

Smartphone Link
(Stitcher)

6. Press Stitcher.

4. Press

D.

7-33

If the smartphone is not connected
to the infotainment system or the
application is not installed on the
smartphone. The Stitcher menu is
not activated.
Thumbs Up and Thumbs Down
Rate tracks by using - (thumbs up)
or , (thumbs down).
Pause
.

5. Press smartphone link.
.

j to pause.
Press r to resume.
Press

Changing Stations

Some images and explanations may
vary by phone operating systems,
versions, and/or application (App)
versions.

Press l to change to the next
station.

Using Stitcher™

To save a station as a favorite,
press q on the stitcher screen.

Saving Favorites

1. Install the Stitcher application on
the smartphone.
7. Press Stitcher.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-34

Black plate (34,1)

Infotainment System

Stitcher Menus
The Stitcher Station menu displays
available station data from the
Stitcher server.

Bluetooth Phone/
Devices

1. Press MENU. The Stitcher
Station menu is displayed.

Pictures and Movies
(Audio System)

2. Press Q or R to scroll through
the list. Select the desired
station.

The infotainment system can play
the music files contained in the USB
storage device or iPod/iPhone
products.

Tone Settings
1. Press MENU. The Stitcher menu
is displayed.
2. Press tone settings. The tone
settings menu is displayed. See
“Tone Settings” under “Radio
Controls With Touchscreen” in
Operation on page 7‑5.

.

ID3 Tag information for MP3
files, such as the album name
and the artist, can be played.

.

To display album title, track title,
and artist information, the file
should be compatible with the
ID3 Tag V1 and V2 formats.

Using USB Storage Devices and
iPod/iPhone
.

Use a USB or flash memory type
storage device. Do not connect
using a USB adaptor.

.

Do not connect and reconnect
the USB device repeatedly in a
short time, as this may cause
static electricity and problems
using the device.

.

Use a USB device with a metal
connecting terminal.

.

Connection with i-Stick Type
USB storage devices may be
faulty due to vehicle vibration.

.

Do not to touch the USB
connecting terminal.

Audio System Information
Using MP3/WMA/OGG/WAV Files
.

Music files with .mp3, .wma,
.ogg, and .wav file name
extensions can be played.

.

MP3 files that can be played are:
Bit rate: 8 kbps ~ 320 kbps Sampling frequency: 48 kHz,
44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 24 kHz, 22.05
kHz, and 16 kHz.

.

Files with a bit rate above
128 kbps will result in higher
quality sound.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (35,1)

Infotainment System
.

Only USB storage devices
formatted in FAT16/32, exFAT
file system are recognized.
NTFS and other file systems are
not recognized.

.

The time it takes to process files
will depend on the USB storage
device type and capacity, and
the type of files stored.

.

Some USB storage device files
may not be compatible.

.

Up to two USB devices and one
iPod can be played through a
USB hub. All devices may not be
supported, depending on the
performance of the USB hub.
If there is not enough power
supply, it may not operate
normally.

.

Do not disconnect the USB
storage device while it is playing.
This may cause damage to the
product or affect the
performance of the USB device.

.

Disconnect the USB storage
device when the ignition is
turned off. If the ignition is turned

on while the USB device is
connected, the USB device may
be damaged or may not operate
normally.
.

USB storage devices can only
be connected for playing music/
movies, viewing photo files,
or upgrading.

.

Do not use the USB terminal to
charge USB accessory
equipment. The heat generated
may cause performance issues
or damage.

.

.

Store files in the top-level drive
of the USB storage device.
When the logical drive is
separated from the device, only
the USB music files from the
top-level logical drive can be
played. Music files stored on
USB storage devices may not
play normally if an application is
loaded by partitioning a separate
drive.
Music files to which Digital Right
Management (DRM) is applied
cannot be played.

7-35

.

USB storage device capacity
limit is 2,500 music files, 2500
photo files, 250 movie files,
2,500 folders, and 10 stages of
folder structure. The iPod/iPhone
can play all music files
supported, but will only display
up to 2,500 files on the screen in
alphabetical order.

.

The following iPod/iPhone
product models are supported:
‐ iPod 2G nano®/iPod 3G nano/
iPod 4G and 5G nano
‐ iPod 120GB and 160GB
classic®
‐ iPod 1G, 2G, and 3G touch®
‐ iPhone 3G and 3GS
‐ iPhone 4/4S

.

Only connect the iPod/iPhone
with connection cables
supported by iPod/iPhone
products. Other connection
cables cannot be used.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-36

Infotainment System

.

The iPod/iPhone may be
damaged if the ignition is turned
off when it is connected to the
vehicle. When not in use,
disconnect the iPod/iPhone.

.

When the iPod/iPhone is
connected to the USB port by
using the iPod/iPhone cable, the
Bluetooth music is not
supported.

.

.

Black plate (36,1)

Connect the iPod/iPhone to the
USB port by using the iPod/
iPhone cable to play the music
files. When the iPod/iPhone is
connected to the AUX input
terminal, the music file will
not play.
The iPod/iPhone playback
functions and the information
displayed may be different when
played on the infotainment
system.

.

Refer to the table for the
classification items related to the
search function provided by the
iPod/iPhone.

If the USB device is already
connected:

D.

.

Press

USB Player

.

Press audio.

Playing Music from a USB Device

.

Press SourceR.

.

Press USB.

.

Connect the USB device to the
USB port.

.

Play will start automatically after
the system has finished reading
the USB device.

.

If a non-readable USB device is
connected, an error message
displays and the system will
switch to the previous audio
function.

To stop the USB device and select
another media source, press
SourceR, then select the other
source.
To remove the USB device, select
another function, then remove the
USB device.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (37,1)

Infotainment System
Pause
.
.

j to pause.
Press r to resume.
Press

.

1: Plays the current file
repeatedly.

.

ALL: Plays all files repeatedly.

.

OFF: Returns to normal
playback.

Changing to Next/Previous Files
.

Press l to change to the
next file.

Playing a File Randomly

.

Press g within five seconds of
the playback time to play the
previous file.

.

NO: Plays all files randomly.

.

OFF: Returns to normal
playback.

Press

Viewing Information on the
Currently Playing File

Press g after five seconds of the
playback time.

Press the title during playback to
display information about the current
file playing.

Press and hold g or l during
playback to rewind or fast forward.
Release the button to resume
playback at normal speed.
Playing a File Repeatedly
Press

v during playback.

.

.

The information for songs
expressed in special symbols or
in unavailable languages may be
displayed as “u.”

Using the USB Music Menu
.

Press MENU during playback.

.

Press the play mode.

u during playback.

Returning to the Beginning of the
Current File

Scanning Forward or Backward

.

7-37

The information displayed
includes the title, file name,
folder name, and artist/album
saved with the song.
Incorrect information cannot be
modified or corrected on the
infotainment system.

Tone Settings
1. Press

R.

2. Press tone settings. The Tone
Settings menu is displayed. See
“Tone Settings” under “Radio
Controls with Touchscreen” in
Operation on page 7‑5.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-38

Infotainment System

iPod/iPhone player
This feature is limited to models
supporting the iPod/iPhone
connection.
Playing Music Files
.

.

.

Black plate (38,1)

Connect the iPod/iPhone to the
USB port.
Play will start from the previously
played point after the system
has finished reading the USB
device.
If a non-readable USB device is
connected, an error message
displays and the system will
switch to the previous audio
function.

If the iPod/iPhone is already
connected:

To stop the device and select
another media source, press
SourceR, then select the other
source.

Press and hold g or l during
playback to rewind or fast-forward.
Release the button to resume
playback at normal speed.

To remove the device, select
another function, then remove the
device.

Playing a File Repeatedly

Pause

.

1: Plays the current file
repeatedly.

.

ALL: Plays all files repeatedly.

.

OFF: Returns to normal
playback.

.
.

j to pause.
Press r to resume.
Press

Press

Changing to Next/Previous Song
.

.

Press l to change to the
next song.
Press g within two seconds of
the playback time to play the
previous file.

v during playback.

Playing a File Randomly
Press

u during playback.

.

NO: Plays all files randomly.

.

OFF: Returns to normal
playback.

Returning to the Beginning of the
Current File

Viewing Information on the
Currently Playing Song

Press SourceR.

Press g after two seconds of the
playback time.

Press iPod.

Scanning Forward or Backward

Press the title during playback to
display information about the current
song playing.

D.

.

Press

.

Press audio.

.
.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (39,1)

Infotainment System
.

The information displayed
includes the title, file name,
folder name, and artist/album
saved with the song.

.

Incorrect information cannot be
modified or corrected on the
infotainment system.

.

The information for songs
expressed in special symbols or
in unavailable languages may be
displayed as “u.”

Tone Settings
1. Press

.

File extensions: .jpg, .bmp, .png,
.gif. Animated .gif files are not
supported.

.

Some files may not operate due
to a different recording format or
the condition of file.

R on the iPod menu.

2. Press tone settings. The tone
settings menu is displayed. See
“Tone Settings” under “Radio
Controls with Touchscreen” in
Operation on page 7‑5.

Pictures and Movies
(Picture System)

7-39

Viewing Pictures
1. Connect the USB device to the
USB port.

The Infotainment system can view
picture files that are stored on a
USB device.
Picture System Information
Caution For Using Picture Files
.

Using the iPod Menu
.

Press MENU during playback.

.

Press the appropriate
play mode.

File size:
‐ JPG: Within 64 to 5,000 pixels
(Width) and 64 to 5,000 pixels
(Height).

2. Press the screen to open to full
screen. Press the screen again
to return to the previous screen.

‐ BMP, PNG, GIF: Within 64 to
1,024 pixels (Width) and 64 to
1,024 pixels (Height).

If the USB device is already
connected:
1. Press

D.

2. Press picture & movie.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-40

Black plate (40,1)

Infotainment System

3. Press SourceR.

Using the USB Picture Menu

4. Press USB picture.

1. Press MENU from the picture
screen.

Some features are disabled while
the vehicle is in motion.
Viewing Slide Show
From the picture screen, press

z.

.

The slide show will start to play.

.

Press the screen to cancel the
slide show during the slide show
playback.

Viewing a Previous or Next
Picture
Press t or
screen.
Press y or
screen.

Press

x from the picture screen.

.

display setting: adjusts for
Brightness and Contrast.

4 to exit.

Pictures and Movies
(Movie System)
2. Press the appropriate menu:
.

picture file list: lists all
picture files.

.

sort by title: shows pictures
in title order.

.

sort by date: shows pictures
in date order.

.

slide show time: allows
selection of the slide show
interval.

w from the picture

Enlarging a Picture

clock/temp display: allows
selection of On or Off to
show the clock and
temperature on the full
screen.

3. Press

u from the picture

Rotating a Picture

.

The infotainment system can play
movie files that are stored on a USB
device.
Movie System Information
Caution For Using Movie Files
.

Available resolution: Within 720
x 576 (W x H) pixels.

.

Frame rate: Less than 30 fps.

.

Playable movie file: .avi, .mpg,
.mp4, .divx, .xvid, .wmv. The
playable movie file may not be
played according to the codec
format.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (41,1)

Infotainment System
.

.

.

Playable Codec format: divx,
xvid, mpeg-1, mpeg-4 (mpg4,
mp42, mp43), wmv9 (wmv3).
Playable Audio format: MP3,
AC3, AAC, WMA.
Max Video Bitrate:
‐ mpeg-1: 8Mbps
‐ mpeg-4 (mpg4, mp42, mp43):
4Mbps
‐ wmv9: 3 Mbps
‐ divx 3: 3 Mbps
‐ divx 4/5/6: 4.8 Mbps
‐ xvid: 4.5 Mbps

.

Max Audio Bitrate:
‐ mp3: 320 Kbps

.

Playing a Movie File

Pause

1. Connect the USB device to the
USB port.

.

2. Press the screen to open to full
screen. Press the screen again
to return to the previous screen.

1. Press

D.

2. Press picture & movie.
3. Press SourceR.

j to pause.
Press r to resume.
Press

Changing to Next/Previous Movie
.

Press u to change to the
next file.

.

Press t within five seconds of
the playback time to play the
previous file.

If the USB device is already
connected:

Returning to the Beginning of the
Current Movie

4. Press USB movie.
Movie is not available while driving.
Viewing Slide Show

z.

‐ wma: 320 Kbps

From the picture screen, press

‐ ac-3: 640 Kbps

.

The slide show will start to play.

‐ aac: 449 Kbps

.

Press the screen to cancel the
slide show during the slide show
playback.

.

The last played audio source will
play as background music
during the slide show playback.

Movie files to which Digital Right
Management (DRM) is applied
may not be played.

.

7-41

Press t after five seconds of the
playback time.
Scanning Forward or Backward
Press and hold t or u during
playback to rewind or fast-forward.
Release the button to resume
playback at normal speed.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-42

Black plate (42,1)

Infotainment System

Viewing Full Screen
Press t from the movie screen.
Press t again to return to the
previous screen.
Using the USB Movie Menu
1. Press MENU from the movie
screen.

.

display settings: adjusts for
Brightness and Contrast.

Audio Language

.

tone settings: shows the
sound setup. See “Tone
Settings” under “Radio
Controls with Touchscreen”
in Operation on page 7‑5.

.

3. Press

4 to exit.

Subtitle Language
If the movie file has a subtitle
language, it can be viewed.
.
.

q from the movie screen.
Press S or T on the pop-up
Press

screen.
.

2. Press the appropriate menu:
.

movie file list: lists all movie
files.

.

clock/temp display: allows
selection of On or Off to
show the clock and
temperature on the full
screen.

Press r to close the pop-up
screen.

If there is only one subtitle
language, it can be set to On/Off.

If the movie file has an audio
language, it can be used.

.

q from the movie screen.
Press Z S or T on the pop-up
Press

screen.
.

Press r to close the pop-up
screen.

If there is only one audio language,
it cannot be set. Audio language
can be set only when the movie file
is the Divx File.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (43,1)

Infotainment System

Trademarks and
License Agreements

Covered by one or more of the
following U.S. patents: 7,295,673;
7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274.

FCC Information

DivX®, DivX Certified® and
associated logos are trademarks of
Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries
and are used under license.

See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑15 regarding Part 15 of the
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with
Industry Canada Standards
RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth word mark and logos
are owned by the Bluetooth® SIG,
Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.

“Made for iPod” and “Made for
iPhone” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to
connect specifically to iPod or
iPhone and has been certified by
the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
iPod and iPhone are trademarks of
Apple Computer, Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.

DivX Certified® to play DivX® video,
including premium content.

7-43

Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee,
taxes, one time activation fee, and
other fees may apply. Subscription
fee is consumer only. All fees and
programming subject to change.
Subscriptions subject to Customer
Agreement available at
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM®
service only available in the
48 contiguous United States and
Canada.
In Canada: Some deterioration of
service may occur in extreme
northern latitudes. This is beyond
the control of SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

7-44

Black plate (44,1)

Infotainment System

Explicit Language Notice: Channels
with frequent explicit language are
indicated with an “XL” preceding the
channel name. Channel blocking is
available for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio receivers by notifying
SiriusXM:
.

USA: 866-635-2349 or see
www.siriusxm.com.

.

Canada: 877-209-0079 or see
www.xmradio.ca.

It is prohibited to copy, decompile,
disassemble, reverse engineer,
hack, manipulate, or otherwise
make available any technology or
software incorporated in receivers
compatible with the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio System or that
support the SiriusXM website, the
Online Service or any of its content.
Furthermore, the AMBER voice
compression software included in
this product is protected by
intellectual property rights including
patent rights, copyrights, and trade
secrets of Digital Voice
Systems, Inc.

General Requirements:
1. A License Agreement from
SiriusXM is required for any
product that incorporates
SiriusXM Technology and/or for
use of any of the SiriusXM
marks to be manufactured,
distributed, or marketed in the
SiriusXM Service Area.
2. For products to be distributed,
marketed, and/or sold in
Canada, a separate agreement
is required with Canadian
Satellite Radio Inc. (operating as
XM Canada).
FreeType 2
Portions of this software are
copyright ® 2007-2012 The
FreeType Project
(www.freetype.org). All rights
reserved.
Libjpeg
The navigation software is based in
part on the work of the independent
JPEG Group.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (1,1)

Climate Controls

Climate Controls

Climate Control
Systems

Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation
for the vehicle can be controlled
with this system.

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1

Air Vents

8-1

A (Fan Control):

Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Turning the
fan control to 0 turns the fan off. The
fan must be turned on to run the air
conditioning compressor.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
change the current airflow mode.

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Maintenance
Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Temperature Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the
temperature.
Select from the following air delivery
modes:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level):

2. Air Conditioning

Air is divided
between the instrument panel and
floor outlets.

3. Recirculation

[ (Floor):

4. Temperature Control

floor outlets.

1. Fan Control

5. Rear Window Defogger
6. Air Delivery Mode Control

Air is directed to the

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

8-2

Black plate (2,1)

Climate Controls

W (Defog): This mode clears the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is
directed to the floor, windshield, and
side window outlets.
0 (Defrost):

This mode clears the
windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield and side window outlets.
Do not drive the vehicle until all
windows are clear.

# (Air Conditioning):

Turn A to
the desired speed. The air
conditioning does not operate when
the fan control knob is at 0. Press
# to turn the air conditioning on
and off. When # is pressed, an
indicator light comes on to show
that the air conditioning is on.
Using air conditioning and
recirculation together for long
periods of time may cause the air
inside the vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening,
after the air in the vehicle has
cooled, turn the recirculation
mode off.

M (Recirculation): This mode
recirculates and helps to quickly
cool the air inside the vehicle. It can
be used to prevent outside air and
odors from entering the vehicle.
Press the button to turn the
recirculation mode on. An indicator
light comes on to show that the
recirculation is on. Press the button
again to return to outside air mode.
Using the recirculation mode for
extended periods may cause the
windows to fog. If this happens,
select the defrost mode.

Rear Window Defogger

1 (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light
comes on to show that the feature
is on.
The rear window defogger turns off
after about 10 minutes. It can also
be turned off by pressing 1 again
or by turning the ignition to ACC/

ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
If turned on again it runs for about
five minutes before turning off.
Notice: Do not use anything
sharp on the inside of the rear
window. If you do, you could cut
or damage the warming grid, and
the repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
attach a temporary vehicle
license, tape, a decal, or anything
similar to the defogger grid.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (3,1)

Climate Controls

Air Vents

Operation Tips

Adjustable air vents are in the
center and on the side of the
instrument panel.

Press the cover of the side air vents
to open. Turn open slats clockwise
or counterclockwise to direct airflow
as needed. Close the cover to stop
the airflow.
Move the slats to change the
direction of the airflow. The center
air vent does not close completely.

8-3

Additional air vents are located
beneath the windshield and the
driver and passenger side door
windows, and in the footwells.
These are fixed and cannot be
adjusted.

.

Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from air inlets at the
base of the windshield that could
block the flow of air into the
vehicle.

.

Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.

.

Use of non-GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside
of the vehicle.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

8-4

Black plate (4,1)

Climate Controls

Maintenance
Air Intake

Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The filter removes dust, pollen, and
other airborne irritants from outside
air that is pulled into the vehicle.
The filter should be replaced as part
of routine scheduled maintenance.
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑2. To find out what type of
filter to use, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11‑13.
2. Push the two tabs upwards and
release the latches holding the
service door. Lift the
service door.
3. Remove the old air filter.

The air intake at the base of the
windshield inside the engine
compartment must be kept clear to
allow the flow of air into the vehicle.
Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves.

4. Install the new air filter.
5. Close the service door and
latches.
6. Re-install the glove box.
See your dealer if additional
assistance is needed.
1. Open the glove box completely
and pull it up by each side to
remove.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (1,1)

Driving and Operating

Driving and
Operating
Driving Information
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-6
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . .
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-13
9-14
9-15
9-16

Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . .
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-17
9-17
9-19
9-20
9-20

Engine Exhaust
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-22

Manual Transmission
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-24

Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

9-1

Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Fuel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-33
California Fuel
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-33
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

Towing
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-2

Driving and Operating

Driving Information
Distracted Driving
Distraction comes in many forms
and can take your focus from the
task of driving. Exercise good
judgment and do not let other
activities divert your attention away
from the road. Many local
governments have enacted laws
regarding driver distraction. Become
familiar with the local laws in
your area.
To avoid distracted driving, always
keep your eyes on the road, hands
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
.

.

Black plate (2,1)

Do not use a phone in
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to
place or receive necessary
phone calls.
Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.

.

Designate a front seat
passenger to handle potential
distractions.

.

Become familiar with vehicle
features before driving, such as
programming favorite radio
stations and adjusting climate
control and seat settings.
Program all trip information into
any navigation device prior to
driving.

.

Wait until the vehicle is parked
to retrieve items that have fallen
to the floor.

.

Stop or park the vehicle to tend
to children.

.

Keep pets in an appropriate
carrier or restraint.

.

Avoid stressful conversations
while driving, whether with a
passenger or on a cell phone.

{ WARNING
Taking your eyes off the road too
long or too often could cause a
crash resulting in injury or death.
Focus your attention on driving.
Refer to the Infotainment section for
more information on using that
system, including pairing and using
a cell phone.

Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
page 3‑9.
.

Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and
other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes.
Anticipate what they might do
and be ready.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (3,1)

Driving and Operating
.

Allow enough following distance
between you and the driver in
front of you.

.

Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk Driving
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.

{ WARNING

Control of a Vehicle
Braking, steering, and accelerating
are important factors in helping to
control a vehicle while driving.

Braking
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding to
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is
reaction time.

Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking.

Average driver reaction time is
about three-quarters of a second. In
that time, a vehicle moving at
100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
(66 ft), which could be a lot of
distance in an emergency.

Do not drink and drive or ride with
a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.

.

Keep enough distance between
you and the vehicle in front
of you.

.

Avoid needless heavy braking.

.

Keep pace with traffic.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
include:

9-3

If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
brakes. Doing so could make the
pedal harder to push down. If the
engine stops, there will be some
power brake assist but it will be
used when the brake is applied.
Once the power assist is used up, it
can take longer to stop and the
brake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering
Electric Power Steering
The vehicle has electric power
steering. It does not have power
steering fluid. Regular maintenance
is not required.
If power steering assist is lost due
to a system malfunction, the vehicle
can be steered, but may require
increased effort. See your dealer if
there is a problem.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-4

Driving and Operating

If the steering wheel is turned until it
reaches the end of its travel and is
held against that position for an
extended period of time, power
steering assist may be reduced.
Normal use of the power steering
assist should return when the
system cools down.
See your dealer if there is a
problem.

Curve Tips
.

Take curves at a reasonable
speed.

.

Reduce speed before entering a
curve.

.

Maintain a reasonable steady
speed through the curve

.

Wait until the vehicle is out of
the curve before accelerating
gently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies
.

Black plate (4,1)

There are some situations when
steering around a problem may
be more effective than braking.

.

Holding both sides of the
steering wheel allows you to turn
180 degrees without removing
a hand.

The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving. Follow
these tips:

.

The Antilock Brake System
(ABS) allows steering while
braking.

1. Ease off the accelerator and
then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer the vehicle so that it
straddles the edge of the
pavement.

Off-Road Recovery

2. Turn the steering wheel about
one-eighth of a turn, until the
right front tire contacts the
pavement edge.
3. Turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.

Loss of Control
Skidding
There are three types of skids that
correspond to the vehicle's three
control systems:
.

Braking Skid — wheels are not
rolling.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (5,1)

Driving and Operating
.

.

Steering or Cornering Skid —
too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force.
Acceleration Skid — too much
throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skids
by taking reasonable care suited to
existing conditions, and by not
overdriving those conditions. But
skids are always possible.
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow
these suggestions:
.

.

Ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly
steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. The vehicle may
straighten out. Be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Slow down and adjust your
driving according to weather
conditions. Stopping distance
can be longer and vehicle
control can be affected when
traction is reduced by water,
snow, ice, gravel, or other

material on the road. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such
as enough water, ice, or packed
snow on the road to make a
mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
.

Try to avoid sudden steering,
acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed
by shifting to a lower gear. Any
sudden changes could cause
the tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep‐standing or flowing water.

9-5

{ WARNING
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause the
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-6

Black plate (6,1)

Driving and Operating
Turn off cruise control.

Hydroplaning

.

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under the vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast
enough. When the vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.

Highway Hypnosis

There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.

Always be alert and pay attention to
your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park the vehicle
and rest.
Other driving tips include:
.

Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Keep the interior
temperature cool.

.

Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:

Keep your eyes moving — scan
the road ahead and to the sides.

.

Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.

.

Allow extra following distance.

.

Pass with caution.

.

Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.

.

Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.

.

Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires on
page 10‑34.

Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
.

Keep the vehicle serviced and in
good shape.

.

Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.

.

Shift to a lower gear when going
down steep or long hills.

{ WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.

{ WARNING
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down
and they could get so hot that
(Continued)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (7,1)

Driving and Operating
WARNING (CONTINUED)
they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You
could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in
gear when going downhill.
.

.

.

Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your
own lane.
Be alert on top of hills;
something could be in your lane
(stalled car, accident).
Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.

Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to
fall, resulting in even less traction.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
surface under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
improves vehicle stability during
hard stops on slippery roads, but

9-7

apply the brakes sooner than when
on dry pavement. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) on page 9‑25.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy
when the surrounding roads are
clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
Turn off cruise control on slippery
surfaces.

Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 13‑5.
To get help and keep everyone in
the vehicle safe:
.

Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-8
.

Driving and Operating

Tie a red cloth to an outside
mirror.

{ WARNING
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.

.

.

Black plate (8,1)

Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window about 5 cm
(2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)
.

.

Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside the
vehicle and set the fan speed
to the highest setting. See
“Climate Control Systems” in
the Index.

For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑21.
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of
the way to save heat. Repeat this
until help arrives but only when you

feel really uncomfortable from the
cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the
rocking method. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑27.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (9,1)

Driving and Operating

{ WARNING
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little
as possible and avoid going
above 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out
Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. Turn off any traction
system. Shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and a low
forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the
wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear.

Slowly spinning the wheels in the
forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get
the vehicle out after a few tries, it
might need to be towed out. If the
vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑65.

Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how
much weight the vehicle can
carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
Two labels on the vehicle show
how much weight it may
properly carry: the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Certification label.

9-9

{ WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-10

Black plate (10,1)

Driving and Operating

Tire and Loading Information
Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle's center
pillar (B-pillar). The Tire and
Loading Information label shows
the number of occupant seating
positions (1), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (2) in
kilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows the
tire size of the original
equipment tires (3) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (4). For more
information on tires and inflation
see Tires on page 10‑34 and
Tire Pressure on page 10‑41.
There is also important loading
information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axle. See “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The

combined weight of
occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
placard.

2. Determine the combined

weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined

weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals

the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and
there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lbs).

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (11,1)

Driving and Operating

9-11

5. Determine the combined

weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing

a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
This vehicle is neither designed
nor intended to tow a trailer.

Example 1
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for

Example 1 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @

68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
(300 lbs).
3. Available Occupant and

Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).

Example 2
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for

Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @

68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg
(750 lbs).
3. Available Cargo Weight =

113 kg (250 lbs).

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-12

Black plate (12,1)

Driving and Operating
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for

Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @

3. Available Cargo Weight =

0 kg (0 lbs).
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and

And, if there is a heavy load, it
should be spread out. See
“Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this
section.

{ WARNING

Example 3

91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).

fuel, and cargo. Never exceed
the GVWR for the vehicle, or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certification
label is attached to the vehicle's
center pillar (B-pillar). The label
tells the gross weight capacity of
the vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants,

Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (13,1)

Driving and Operating
If you put things inside the
vehicle — like suitcases, tools,
packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING
Things inside the vehicle can
strike and injure people in a
sudden stop or turn, or in a
crash.
.

Put things in the cargo
area of the vehicle. In the
cargo area, put them as
far forward as possible.
Try to spread the weight
evenly.
(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)
.

.

Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.

.

Secure loose items in the
vehicle.

.

Do not leave a seat folded
down unless needed.

9-13

Starting and
Operating
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not
need an elaborate break-in. But it
will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
.

Do not drive at any one
constant speed, fast or slow,
for the first 805 km (500 mi).
Do not make full-throttle
starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.

.

Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 mi) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake
linings.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-14

Black plate (14,1)

Driving and Operating

Following break‐in, engine speed
and load can be gradually
increased.

Ignition Positions

1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/
OFF): When the vehicle is stopped,
turn the ignition switch to LOCK/
OFF to turn the engine off.
This position locks the steering
wheel, ignition, and transmission.
The ignition switch can bind in the
LOCK/OFF position with the wheels
turned off center. If this happens,
move the steering wheel from right
to left while turning the key to ACC/
ACCESSORY. If this does not work,
then the vehicle needs service.

The ignition switch has four different
positions.
The uplevel key must be fully
extended to start the vehicle.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition
must be in ON/RUN and the regular
brake pedal applied.

Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
If the vehicle must be shut off in an
emergency:
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
This can be done while the
vehicle is moving. After shifting
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
brakes and steer the vehicle to a
safe location.
3. Come to a complete stop. Shift
to P (Park) with an automatic
transmission, or Neutral with a
manual transmission. Turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF.
4. Set the parking brake. See
Parking Brake on page 9‑26.

{ WARNING
Turning off the vehicle while
moving may cause loss of power
assist in the brake and steering
systems and disable the airbags.
While driving, only shut the
vehicle off in an emergency.
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,
and must be shut off while driving,
turn the ignition to ACC/
ACCESSORY.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (15,1)

Driving and Operating
Notice: Using a tool to force the
key to turn in the ignition could
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct
key, make sure it is all the way in,
and turn it only with your hand.
If the key cannot be turned by
hand, see your dealer.
2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the
position in which you can operate
things like the radio and the
windshield wipers when the engine
is off.
3 (ON/RUN): This position can be
used to operate the electrical
accessories and to display some
instrument cluster warning and
indicator lights. This position can
also be used for service and
diagnostics, and to verify the proper
operation of the malfunction
indicator lamp as may be required
for emission inspection purposes.
The switch stays in this position
when the engine is running.

If you leave the key in the ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to
start the vehicle if the battery is
allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
4 (START): This is the position that
starts the engine. When the engine
starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for
driving.
A warning tone will sound when the
driver door is opened, the ignition is
in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
OFF, and the key is in the ignition.
If the ignition becomes difficult to
turn with the uplevel key, see Keys
on page 2‑1.

9-15

Starting the Engine
Automatic Transmission
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.

Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in Neutral
and the parking brake engaged.
Hold the clutch pedal to the floor
and start the engine. The vehicle
will not start if the clutch pedal is not
all the way down.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-16

Black plate (16,1)

Driving and Operating

Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition to START.
When the engine cranks, let go
of the key. The idle speed will go
down as the engine gets warm.
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. It assists in starting the
engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is
turned to START and then
released when the engine
begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking for a
few seconds or until the engine
starts. If the engine does not
start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent
damage. To prevent gear
damage, cranking is not allowed
if the engine is running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by
turning the ignition key to ACC/
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.

Notice: Holding the key in START
for longer than 15 seconds at a
time will cause the battery to be
drained much sooner. And the
excessive heat can damage the
starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to
help avoid draining the battery or
damaging the starter.
2. If the engine does not start, wait
about 15 seconds and try again.
Wait about 15 seconds between
each try.
When the engine has run about
10 seconds to warm up, the
vehicle is ready to be driven. Do
not run the engine at high speed
when it is cold.
If the weather is below freezing
(0°C or 32°F), let the engine run
for a few minutes to warm up.
3. If the engine still will not start,
or starts but then stops, it could
be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the
accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as

you hold the key in START for
about three seconds. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then
stops again, do the same thing,
but this time keep the pedal
down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline
from the engine.
Notice: If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change
the way the engine operates. Any
resulting damage would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
See Add-On Electrical Equipment
on page 9‑37.

Engine Heater
The engine heater can provide
easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up in
cold weather conditions at or below
−18°C (0°F). Vehicles with an
engine heater should be plugged in
at least four hours before starting.
1. Turn off the engine.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (17,1)

Driving and Operating

{ WARNING

2. Open the hood and unwrap the
electrical cord. The cord is
located in the passenger side of
the engine compartment, near
the engine coolant container.
It is shipped from the factory
with a tie holding it in place. Use
care in removing the tie so that
the cord is not damaged.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.

Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts.
If you do not it could be
damaged.
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this.

9-17

Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories may be
used for up to 10 minutes after the
engine is turned off:
.

Audio System

.

Power Windows

The power windows will continue to
work for up to 10 minutes or until
any door is opened. The radio will
work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is
turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,
the radio will continue to work for
10 minutes, or until the driver door is
opened or the key is removed from
the ignition.

Shifting Into Park
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake. See
Parking Brake on page 9‑26.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-18

Black plate (18,1)

Driving and Operating

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by pressing the button on the
shift lever and pushing the lever
all the way toward the front of
the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to
LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with
you. If you can leave the vehicle
with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with the
Engine Running (Automatic
Transmission)

{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
It could overheat and catch fire.
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
page 9‑17.
If you have to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, be sure the
vehicle is in P (Park) and the
parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you have moved
the shift lever into P (Park), hold the
brake pedal down. Then see if you
can move the shift lever away from
P (Park) without first pushing the
button on the shift lever. If you can,
it means that the shift lever was not
fully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock (Automatic
Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you
do not shift your transmission into
P (Park) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on
the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult
to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the
parking brake and then shift into
P (Park) properly before you leave
the driver seat. To find out how, see
“Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission)” in this section.
When you are ready to drive, move
the shift lever out of P (Park) before
you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may
need to have another vehicle push
yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transmission, so you can pull
the shift lever out of P (Park).

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (19,1)

Driving and Operating

Shifting out of Park

3. Press the shift lever button.

This vehicle is equipped with a shift
lock control. The shift lock control is
designed to:

4. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.

Prevent ignition key removal
unless the shift lever is in
P (Park) with the shift lever
button fully released.

1. Fully release the shift lever
button.

.

.

Prevent movement of the shift
lever out of P (Park) unless the
ignition is in ON/RUN and the
brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock control is always
functional except in the case of an
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9-volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑63.
To shift out of P (Park):
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

If still unable to shift out of P (Park):

2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button
again.

9-19

lost power, the shift lever cannot be
moved from P (Park) unless the shift
lock manual release is disengaged
manually.
To access the shift lock manual
release:
1. Apply the parking brake.

3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
If the shift lever still cannot be
moved from P (Park), see “Shift
Lock Manual Release.”
The doors may lock when shifting
from P (Park). See Automatic Door
Locks on page 2‑5.

Shift Lock Manual Release
The automatic transmission has an
electric park lock. The key must be
in the ON/RUN position, and the
brake pedal pressed so the shift
lever can be moved from the
P (Park) position. If the battery has

2. Open the cover to the left of the
shift lever.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-20

Black plate (20,1)

Driving and Operating

Parking

3. Insert a tool into the opening as
far as it will go and move the
shift lever out of P (Park).
If P (Park) is selected again, the
shift lever will be locked again.
Have the cause of the problem
fixed by your dealer.
4. Close the cover.

If the vehicle has a manual
transmission, before getting out of
the vehicle, move the shift lever into
R (Reverse) if parking on a downhill
slope. On a level surface or an
uphill slope, use 1 (First) gear.
Firmly apply the parking brake. Turn
the wheels toward the curb for a
downhill slope, or away from the
curb for an uphill slope. Once the
shift lever has been placed into gear
with the clutch pedal pressed in,
turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,
remove the key, and release the
clutch.

Parking over Things
That Burn

{ WARNING
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (21,1)

Driving and Operating

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING
Engine exhaust contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.

The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).

.

The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.

.

The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.

.

The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)
.

There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or aftermarket
modifications that are not
completely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
.

Drive it only with the windows
completely down.

.

Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.

Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.

9-21

Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running.
If the vehicle is left with the engine
running, follow the proper steps to
be sure the vehicle will not move.
See Shifting Into Park on page 9‑17
and Engine Exhaust on page 9‑21.
If the vehicle has a manual
transmission, see Parking on
page 9‑20.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-22

Black plate (22,1)

Driving and Operating

Automatic
Transmission
The automatic transmission is an
electronically controlled four-speed
transmission. Fourth gear is
overdrive. A display in the
instrument cluster indicates the
selected gear.

P (Park): This position locks the
front wheels. It is the best position
to use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.

{ WARNING
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
page 9‑17.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has a shift lock control.
You must fully apply the brake pedal
then press the shift lever button
before you can shift from P (Park)
while the ignition key is in ON/RUN.
If you cannot shift out of P (Park),

ease pressure on the shift lever and
push the shift lever all the way into
P (Park) as you maintain brake
application. Then move the shift
lever into another gear. See Shifting
out of Park on page 9‑19.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice, or sand without
damaging the transmission, see If
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑8.
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
being towed.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (23,1)

Driving and Operating

{ WARNING
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It allows the
transmission to shift into all four
forward gears. Fourth gear is
overdrive which reduces engine
speed and noise while increasing
fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
.

Going less than 56 km/h
(35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.

.

Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
more, push the accelerator all
the way down.

I (Intermediate): This position
allows the transmission to shift from
1 (First) gear to 2 (Second) gear,
and prevents automatic shifting into
3 (Third) gear and 4 (Fourth) gear.
This position can be used for more
power when climbing hills, and for
engine braking when driving down
steep hills.

9-23

L (Low): This position locks the
transmission in 1 (First) gear. Select
1 (First) for maximum engine
braking when driving down severe
grades.
In the event of a fault, the
malfunction indicator lamp
illuminates. The transmission no
longer shifts automatically nor
manually because it is locked in a
predetermined gear. See your
dealer for repairs.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-24

Black plate (24,1)

Driving and Operating

Manual Transmission

If you have come to a complete stop
and it is hard to shift into 1 (First),
put the shift lever in Neutral and let
up on the clutch. Press the clutch
pedal back down. Then shift into
1 (First).
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal
as you let up on the accelerator
pedal and shift into 2 (Second).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal.

Notice: Shifting the vehicle
initially into any gear other than
1 (First) or R (Reverse) can
damage the clutch. Shift the
manual transmission in the
proper sequence, and time the
gear shifting with the accelerator
to avoid revving the engine and
damaging the clutch.
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal
and shift into 1 (First). Then, slowly
let up on the clutch pedal as you
press the accelerator pedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), and 5 (Fifth):
Shift into 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), and
5 (Fifth) the same way as for
2 (Second). Slowly let up on the
clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator
pedal and press the brake pedal.
Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake
pedal, and shift to Neutral.
Neutral: Use this position when
you start or idle the engine.

R (Reverse): To back up, press
down the clutch pedal and shift into
R (Reverse). Let up on the clutch
pedal slowly while pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.

Shift Speeds

{ WARNING
If you skip a gear when you
downshift, you could lose control
of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift
down more than one gear at a
time when you downshift.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (25,1)

Driving and Operating
Up-Shift Light

Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)

Vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission may have an up-shift
light. This light indicates when to
shift to the next higher gear for
better fuel economy.
For the best fuel economy,
accelerate slowly and shift when the
light comes on, and if the weather,
road, and traffic conditions allow.

This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake
pedal moves a little. This is normal.

It is normal for the light to go on and
off if the accelerator position
changes quickly. Ignore the light
during downshifts.
If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑15.

9-25

If driving safely on a wet road and it
becomes necessary to slam on the
brakes and continue braking to
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the
brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-26

Black plate (26,1)

Driving and Operating

suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.

Parking Brake

Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. You might hear the ABS
pump or motor operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
normal.

Brake Assist

Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.

Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before
driving.

To set the parking brake, hold the
brake pedal down and pull up on the
parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light
will come on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 5‑14.
To release the parking brake, hold
the brake pedal down. Pull the
parking brake lever up until you can
press the release button. Hold the
release button in as you move the
brake lever all the way down.

This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the driver
in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the
power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
stop or slow down the vehicle. The
stability system hydraulic brake
control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (27,1)

Driving and Operating
Minor brake pedal pulsation or
pedal movement during this time is
normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal as
the driving situation dictates. The
brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)
This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist
(HSA) feature, which may be useful
when the vehicle is stopped on a
grade. This feature is designed to
prevent the vehicle from rolling,
either forward or rearward, during
vehicle drive off. After the driver
completely stops and holds the
vehicle in a complete standstill on a
grade, HSA will be automatically
activated. During the transition
period between when the driver
releases the brake pedal and starts
to accelerate to drive off on a grade,
HSA holds the braking pressure to
ensure that there is no rolling. The

brakes will automatically release
when the accelerator pedal is
applied within the two-second
window. It will not activate if the
vehicle is in a drive gear and facing
downhill or if the vehicle is in a drive
gear and facing downhill or if the
vehicle is facing uphill and in R
(Reverse).

9-27

Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The vehicle has a TCS that limits
wheel spin. On a front-wheel-drive
vehicle, the system operates if it
senses that one or both of the front
wheels are spinning or beginning to
lose traction. When this happens,
the system brakes the spinning
wheel(s), and/or reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working, but this is
normal.
TCS is on whenever the vehicle is
started. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road
conditions, the system should
always be left on. But, TCS can be
turned off if needed.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-28

Black plate (28,1)

Driving and Operating
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake
or accelerate heavily when TCS is
off. The vehicle's driveline could
be damaged.
TCS/StabiliTrak Light

Traction Off Light

d flashes to indicate that the

The Traction Off Light comes on to
indicate that TCS has been
turned off.

traction control system is active.
If there is a problem detected with
TCS, d comes on in the instrument
cluster and stays on. The vehicle is
safe to drive but the system is not
operational. Driving should be
adjusted accordingly.
If d comes on and stays on, reset
the system:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and wait
15 seconds.
3. Start the engine.
If d still comes on and stays on at a
speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see
your dealer for service.

TCS/StabiliTrak Button
To turn TCS off, press the TCS/
StabiliTrak button on the center
stack.

When TCS is turned off, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Driving
should be adjusted accordingly.
Press and release the TCS/
StabiliTrak button again to turn the
system back on. The Traction Off
Light will go off.
It may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle gets stuck
in sand, mud, or snow and rocking
the vehicle is required. See If the
Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑8. See
also Winter Driving on page 9‑7 for
information on using TCS when
driving in snowy or icy conditions.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (29,1)

Driving and Operating
If cruise control is being used when
TCS activates, cruise control will
automatically disengage. Press the
appropriate cruise control button to
reengage when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on
page 9‑30.

StabiliTrak is on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started. To
assist with directional control of the
vehicle, the system should always
be left on.

The vehicle has a vehicle stability
enhancement system called
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
computer controlled system that
assists with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
StabiliTrak activates when the
computer senses a difference
between the intended path, and the
direction the vehicle is actually
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer
the vehicle in the intended direction.

If d comes on and stays on, reset
the system:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and wait
15 seconds.
3. Start the engine.

Adding accessories can affect the
vehicle performance. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.

StabiliTrak® System

9-29

If d still comes on and stays on,
see your dealer for service.
TCS/StabiliTrak Light
When the stability control system
activates, d flashes on the
instrument cluster. This also occurs
when traction control is activated.
A noise may be heard or vibration
may be felt in the brake pedal. This
is normal. Continue to steer the
vehicle in the intended direction.
If there is a problem detected with
StabiliTrak, d comes on in the
instrument cluster and stays on. The
vehicle is safe to drive but the
system is not operational. Driving
should be adjusted accordingly.

TCS/StabiliTrak Button
The TCS/StabiliTrak button is on the
center stack.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-30

Black plate (30,1)

Driving and Operating

Cruise Control

StabiliTrak Off Light
StabiliTrak can be turned off if
needed by pressing and holding the
g button until i and g come on in
the instrument panel. When
StabiliTrak is turned off, the system
will not assist with directional control
of the vehicle or limit wheel spin.
TCS will also be turned off. Driving
should be adjusted accordingly.
Press and release the g button
again to turn both systems back on.
If cruise control is being used when
StabiliTrak activates, cruise control
will automatically disengage. Press
the appropriate cruise control button
to reengage when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on
page 9‑30.

For vehicles with cruise control, the
vehicle can maintain a speed of
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator. Cruise control does not
work at speeds below 40 km/h
(25 mph).
If the brakes are applied, the cruise
control disengages.
If the vehicle's Traction Control
System (TCS) or StabiliTrak system
begins to limit wheel spin while
using cruise control, the cruise
control will automatically disengage.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑27 or StabiliTrak® System
on page 9‑29. When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, the
cruise control can be turned
back on.

{ WARNING
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (31,1)

Driving and Operating

[ (Cancel):

Resuming a Set Speed

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise control is set at a
desired speed and then the brakes
are applied, the cruise control is
disengaged without erasing the set
speed from memory.

Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
If the cruise button is on when not in
use, it could get bumped and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control button off when cruise
is not being used.

I (On/Off): Press to turn the
cruise control system on and off.
RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate):
Press briefly to make the vehicle
resume to a previously set speed or
to increase vehicle speed if the
cruise control is already activated.
SET/− (Set/Coast): Press to set
the speed and activate cruise
control, or to decrease vehicle
speed if the cruise control is already
activated.

9-31

The cruise control light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on
after the cruise control has been set
to the desired speed.
1. Press

I.

2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press and release the SET/−
button.

To begin using cruise control again,
press the RES/+ button briefly once
the vehicle speed is 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more. The vehicle
returns to the previous set speed
and stays there.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is
already activated:
.

Press and hold the RES/+ button
on the steering wheel until the
desired speed is reached, then
release it.

.

To increase vehicle speed in
small amounts, press the RES/+
button briefly. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

4. Remove foot from the
accelerator.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-32

Black plate (32,1)

Driving and Operating

Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is
already activated:
.

Press and hold the SET/− button
on the steering wheel until the
desired speed is reached, then
release it.

.

To slow down in small amounts,
press the SET/− button on the
steering wheel briefly. Each time
this is done, the vehicle goes
about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle's speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the
previous set cruise speed.

might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to maintain the
vehicle speed. When the brakes are
applied, cruise control is
disengaged.
Ending Cruise Control
There are four ways to end cruise
control:
.

Step lightly on the brake pedal
(manual and automatic
transmissions).

.

Press the clutch pedal to the
floor (manual transmissions).

.

Press

.

To turn off the cruise control,
press I on the steering wheel.

[ on the steering wheel.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

Erasing Speed Memory

How well cruise control works on
hills depends on the vehicle speed,
load, and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you

The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory by pressing
I or if the ignition is turned off.

Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an
important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list
of marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com. TOP TIER
gasoline is only available in the U.S.
and Canada.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (33,1)

Driving and Operating

Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet
ASTM specification D 4814. Some
gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
on page 9‑33 for additional
information.

Recommended Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane rating of 87 or
higher. If the octane rating is less
than 87, an audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.

California Fuel
Requirements
If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards, it is
designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California Emissions
Standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the

9-33

vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑11. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.

Fuels in Foreign
Countries
Never use leaded gasoline or any
other fuel not recommended in the
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel
would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an
auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.

Fuel Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now
required to contain additives that
help prevent engine and fuel system

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-34

Black plate (34,1)

Driving and Operating

deposits from forming, allowing the
emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, nothing
should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean
and avoid problems due to dirty
injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline. Look for the
TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
ensure gasoline meets enhanced
detergency standards developed by
the auto companies. A list of
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
tank at every engine oil change, can
help clean deposits from fuel
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel

System Treatment PLUS is the only
gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors. It is available at
your dealer.
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines might be
available in your area. We
recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
15% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are not
reformulated for low emissions can
contain an octane-enhancing
additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce
spark plug life and affect emission
control system performance. The
malfunction indicator lamp might
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer for service.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (35,1)

Driving and Operating

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn
violently and can cause injury or
death.
.

To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the fuel
pump island.

.

Turn off the engine when
refueling.

.

Keep sparks, flames, and
smoking materials away
from fuel.

.

Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended.

.

.

Do not reenter the vehicle
while pumping fuel.
Keep children away from the
fuel pump and never let
children pump fuel.
(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)
.

Fuel can spray out if the fuel
cap is opened too quickly.
This spray can happen if the
tank is nearly full, and is
more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop
then unscrew the cap all
the way

9-35

The tethered fuel cap is behind a
hinged fuel door on the passenger
side of the vehicle. To open the fuel
filler door, lift the fuel door release
lever on the floor, left front side of
the driver seat. The fuel door is
unlocked when the vehicle is
unlocked. Locking the vehicle locks
the fuel door.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it
slowly counterclockwise.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
top off or overfill the tank and wait a
few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Exterior Care on page 10‑68.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-36

Black plate (36,1)

Driving and Operating

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it
clockwise until it clicks. Make sure
the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑11.
Push the fuel door closed until it
latches.

{ WARNING
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If a new fuel cap is
needed, be sure to get the right
type of cap from your dealer. The
wrong type of fuel cap might not
fit properly, might cause the
malfunction indicator lamp to

light, and could damage the fuel
tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑11.

WARNING (CONTINUED)
.

Place the nozzle inside the fill
opening of the container
before dispensing fuel, and
keep it in contact with the fill
opening until filling is
complete.

.

Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.

Filling a Portable Fuel
Container

{ WARNING
Filling a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle can cause
fuel vapors that can ignite either
by static electricity or other
means. You or others could be
badly burned and the vehicle
could be damaged. Always:
.

Use approved fuel
containers.

.

Remove container from
vehicle, trunk, or pickup bed
before filling.

.

Place container on the
ground.
(Continued)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (37,1)

Driving and Operating

Towing
General Towing
Information
The vehicle is neither designed nor
intended to tow a trailer.

Conversions and
Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Notice: Some electrical
equipment can damage the
vehicle or cause components to
not work and would not be
covered by the warranty. Always
check with your dealer before
adding electrical equipment.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑28 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑28.

9-37

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

9-38

Black plate (38,1)

Driving and Operating

2 NOTES

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (1,1)

Vehicle Care

Vehicle Care
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . .
California Proposition
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements . . . .
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-2
10-2
10-3
10-3

Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Engine Compartment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-9
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Manual Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-11
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-16

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-21
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-22
Wiper Blade
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

10-1

Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-26
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-27
10-28
10-28
10-32

Wheels and Tires
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-36
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Tire Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-2

Black plate (2,1)

Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-52
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

General Information
For service and parts needs, visit
your dealer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of
these marks:

Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

California Proposition
65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (3,1)

Vehicle Care
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.

California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, safety belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained in
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.

Accessories and
Modifications
Adding non‐dealer accessories or
making modifications to the vehicle
can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and

handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and
electronic systems like antilock
brakes, traction control, and stability
control. These accessories or
modifications could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.

10-3

Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work

{ WARNING

Damage to vehicle components
resulting from modifications or the
installation or use of non‐GM
certified parts, including control
module or software modifications, is
not covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.

It can be dangerous to work on
your vehicle if you do not have
the proper knowledge, service
manual, tools, or parts. Always
follow owner manual procedures
and consult the service manual
for your vehicle before doing any
service work.

GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. See your
dealer to accessorize the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories
installed by a dealer technician.

If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can.

Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑28.

This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Airbag System
Check on page 3‑29.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-4

Black plate (4,1)

Vehicle Care

Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed.
Notice: Even small amounts of
contamination can cause damage
to vehicle systems. Do not allow
contaminants to contact the
fluids, reservoir caps,
or dipsticks.

1. Pull the hood release handle
inside the vehicle. It is on the
lower left side of the instrument
panel.

Hood
To open the hood:

3. Lift the hood and release the
hood prop from the prop retainer,
which is under the hood.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
push the secondary hood
release lever up.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (5,1)

Vehicle Care
into place when returning it to
the retainer to prevent hood
damage.
2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)
above the vehicle and release it
so it fully latches. Check to
make sure the hood is closed
and repeat the process if
necessary.

4. Securely place the hood prop
into the hood prop holder, at the
rear passenger side of the
engine compartment.
To close the hood:
1. Before closing the hood, be sure
all filler caps are on properly.
Then, lift the hood to relieve
pressure on the hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from the
prop holder in the rear
passenger side of the engine
compartment and secure it to the
retainer on the underside of the
hood. The prop rod must click

10-5

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-6

Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

Black plate (6,1)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (7,1)

Vehicle Care
1. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑17.
2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Cooling
System on page 10‑12.
3. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑7.
4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑7.

11. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10‑28.

Engine Oil
To ensure proper engine
performance and long life, careful
attention must be paid to engine oil.
Following these simple, but
important steps will help protect
your investment:
.

5. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of
View). See Cooling System on
page 10‑12.
6. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑11.

.

Check the engine oil level
regularly and maintain the
proper oil level. See “Checking
Engine Oil” and “When to Add
Engine Oil” in this section.

.

Change the engine oil at the
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑9.

7. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.
See Brakes on page 10‑18 and
Hydraulic Clutch on page 10‑11.
8. Positive (+) Battery Terminal.
See Battery on page 10‑20.
9. Battery on page 10‑20.
10. Auxiliary Fuse Block. See
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10‑28.

Always use engine oil approved
to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
in this section.

.

Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See “What to Do with
Used Oil” in this section.

10-7

Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the vehicle
must be on level ground. The
engine oil dipstick handle is a loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
engine oil dipstick.
Obtaining an accurate oil level
reading is essential:
1. If the engine has been running
recently, turn off the engine and
allow several minutes for the oil
to drain back into the oil pan.
Checking the oil level too soon
after engine shutoff will not
provide an accurate oil level
reading.

{ WARNING
The engine oil dipstick handle
may be hot; it could burn you.
Use a towel or glove to touch the
dipstick handle.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-8

Black plate (8,1)

Vehicle Care

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
with a paper towel or cloth, then
push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick, add
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
and then recheck the level. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil ” in
this section for an explanation of
what kind of oil to use. For engine
oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
Oil levels above or below the
acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful

to the engine. If you find that you
have an oil level above the
operating range, i.e., the engine
has so much oil that the oil level
gets above the cross-hatched
area that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could
be damaged. You should drain
out the excess oil or limit driving
of the vehicle and seek a service
professional to remove the
excess amount of oil.

Specification
Use and ask for licensed engine oils
with the dexos1® approved
certification mark. Engine oils
meeting the requirements for the
vehicle should have the dexos1
approved certification mark. This
certification mark indicates that the
oil has been approved to the dexos1
specification.

See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range, between the cross-hatched
areas. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Selecting the right engine oil
depends on both the proper oil
specification and viscosity grade.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑12.

Notice: Failure to use the
recommended engine oil or
equivalent can result in engine
damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Check with your
dealer or service provider on
whether the oil is approved to the
dexos1 specification.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (9,1)

Vehicle Care
Viscosity Grade
SAE 5W-20 is the best viscosity
grade for the vehicle. Do not use
other viscosity grade oils such as
SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.
Cold Temperature Operation: In an
area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29°C
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be
used. An oil of this viscosity grade
will provide easier cold starting for
the engine at extremely low
temperatures. When selecting an oil
of the appropriate viscosity grade,
always select an oil of the correct
specification. See “Specification”
earlier in this section for more
information.

Engine Oil Additives/Engine
Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The
recommended oils with the dexos
specification and displaying the
dexos certification mark are all that
is needed for good performance and
engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain
elements that can be unhealthy for
your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your
skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer's warnings about the
use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never
dispose of oil by putting it in the
trash or pouring it on the ground,
into sewers, or into streams or
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil.

10-9

Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system
that indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on a combination of factors which
include engine revolutions, engine
temperature, and miles driven.
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably. For
the oil life system to work properly,
the system must be reset every time
the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished, it
indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A Code 82 (change
engine oil soon) DIC message
comes on. Change the oil as soon
as possible within the next 1 000 km
(600 mi). It is possible that, if driving
under the best conditions, the oil life
system might indicate that an oil
change is not necessary for up to a
year. The engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-10

Black plate (10,1)

Vehicle Care

and, at this time, the system must
be reset. Your dealer has trained
service people who will perform this
work and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly
over the course of an oil drain
interval and keep it at the proper
level.
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next
engine oil change. Always reset the
engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To
reset the system:
1. Display Remaining Oil Life on
the DIC.

2. Press and hold the SET/CLR
button on the DIC for more than
five seconds. The oil life will
change to 100%.
If the Code 82 DIC message comes
back on when the vehicle is started,
the engine oil life system has not
reset. Repeat the procedure.

Automatic Transmission
Fluid
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the
transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer and have it repaired as soon
as possible.
The vehicle is not equipped with a
transmission fluid level dipstick.
There is a special procedure for
checking and changing the
transmission fluid. Because this

procedure is difficult, this should be
done at the dealer. Contact the
dealer for additional information.
Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in Maintenance
Schedule on page 11‑2, and be sure
to use the fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑12.

Manual Transmission
Fluid
How to Check Manual
Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the
manual transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer and have it repaired as soon
as possible.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (11,1)

Vehicle Care

Hydraulic Clutch

How to Check and Add Fluid

For vehicles with a manual
transmission, it is not necessary to
regularly check brake/clutch fluid
unless there is a leak suspected.
Adding fluid will not correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could
indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.

Visually check the brake/clutch fluid
reservoir to make sure the fluid level
is at the MIN (minimum) line on the
side of the reservoir. The brake/
hydraulic clutch fluid system should
be closed and sealed.

When to Check and What
to Use

Do not remove the cap to check the
fluid level or to top off the fluid level.
Remove the cap only when
necessary to add the proper fluid
until the level reaches the MIN line.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid
reservoir cap has this symbol on it.
The common brake/clutch fluid
reservoir is filled with DOT 4 brake
fluid as indicated on the reservoir
cap. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6 for reservoir
location.

The engine air cleaner/filter is in the
engine compartment on the driver
side of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for more information on
location.

When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
scheduled maintenance intervals.
See Maintenance Schedule on

10-11

page 11‑2. If you are driving in
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the engine air cleaner/
filter, remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
release loose dust and dirt. If the
filter remains covered with dirt, a
new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the air cleaner/
filter:

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-12

Black plate (12,1)

Vehicle Care

1. Remove the six screws and lift
the cover out of the assembly.
2. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.

Cooling System
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct
working temperature.

3. Lower the cover and secure with
the six screws.
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑2 for replacement intervals.

{ WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.

{ WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
1. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap
2. Engine Cooling Fan (Out
of View)

Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than
DEX‐COOL® can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (13,1)

Vehicle Care
corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing
sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX‐COOL® (silicate‐free) coolant
in the vehicle.

What to Use

{ WARNING
Adding only plain water or some
other liquid to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water
and other liquids, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
The coolant warning system is set
for the proper coolant mixture.
With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too
hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine
could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/
50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant.

Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is
filled with DEX-COOL engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first.
The following explains the cooling
system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑16.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant. This mixture:
.

Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
temperature.

10-13

.

Gives boiling protection up to
129°C (265°F), engine
temperature.

.

Protects against rust and
corrosion.

.

Will not damage aluminum parts.

.

Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.

Notice: If improper coolant
mixture, inhibitors, or additives
are used in the vehicle cooling
system, the engine could
overheat and be damaged. Too
much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack engine cooling
parts. The repairs would not be
covered by the warranty. Use only
the proper mixture of engine
coolant for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑12.
Never dispose of engine coolant by
putting it in the trash, pouring it on
the ground, or into sewers, streams,
or bodies of water. Have the coolant
changed by an authorized service
center, familiar with legal

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-14

Black plate (14,1)

Vehicle Care

requirements regarding used
coolant disposal. This will help
protect the environment and your
health.

could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.

Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
It is normal to see coolant moving in
the upper coolant hose return line
when the engine is running.
Check to see if coolant is visible in
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until
it cools down.

If coolant is visible but the coolant
level is not at or above the mark
pointed to, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean drinkable water and
DEX-COOL coolant.
Be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
If no coolant is visible in the coolant
surge tank, add coolant as follows:

How to Add Coolant to the
Coolant Surge Tank
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure

If no problem is found, check to see
if coolant is visible in the coolant
surge tank. If coolant is visible but
the coolant level is not at the
indicated level mark, add a 50/
50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL coolant at the
coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is
cool before you do it.

{ WARNING
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn
the cap when the cooling system,
including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and surge tank pressure
cap to cool.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (15,1)

Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or some
other liquid to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water
and other liquids, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
The coolant warning system is set
for the proper coolant mixture.
With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too
hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine
could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/
50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant.

You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.

Notice: In cold weather, water
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core and other
parts. Use the recommended
coolant and the proper coolant
mixture.

10-15

will allow any pressure still left to
be vented out the
discharge hose.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap
slowly and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
the proper DEX-COOL coolant
mixture to the indicated
level mark.
4. With the coolant surge tank
pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you
can feel the upper radiator hose
getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.

1. Remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about
one-quarter of a turn. If you hear
a hiss, wait for that to stop. This

By this time, the coolant level
inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper
DEX-COOL coolant mixture to
the coolant surge tank until the
level reaches the indicated
level mark.
5. Reinstall the pressure cap
tightly.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-16

Black plate (16,1)

Vehicle Care

Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss and
possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
Check the level in the coolant surge
tank when the cooling system has
cooled down. If the coolant is not at
the proper level, repeat Steps 1–
3 and reinstall the pressure cap.
If the coolant still is not at the proper
level when the system cools down
again, see your dealer.

Engine Overheating
The vehicle has an indicator to warn
of the engine overheating. See
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light on page 5‑17.
If the decision is made not to lift the
hood when this warning appears,
get service help right away. See
Roadside Assistance Program on
page 13‑5.
If the decision is made to lift the
hood, make sure the vehicle is
parked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the engine
cooling fan is running. If the engine
is overheating, the fan should be
running. If it is not, do not continue
to run the engine. Have the vehicle
serviced.

WARNING (CONTINUED)
Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
If you keep driving when the
engine is overheated, the liquids
in it can catch fire. You or others
could be badly burned. Stop the
engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.

Notice: Running the engine
without coolant may cause
damage or a fire. Vehicle damage
would not be covered by the
warranty.

If Steam Is Coming from the
Engine Compartment

{ WARNING
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it
off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down.
(Continued)

If No Steam Is Coming from
the Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
.

Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

.

Stops after high-speed driving.

.

Idles for long periods in traffic.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (17,1)

Vehicle Care
If the overheat warning is displayed
with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) for an
automatic transmission or
Neutral for a manual
transmission while stopped. If it
is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) for
an automatic transmission or
Neutral for a manual
transmission, and let the
engine idle.
If the overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the vehicle in
front. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle
right away.

10-17

Adding Washer Fluid

If there is no sign of steam, idle the
engine for three minutes while
parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down.

Washer Fluid
What to Use
When windshield washer fluid is
needed, be sure to read the
manufacturer's instructions before
use. If operating the vehicle in an
area where the temperature may fall
below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against
freezing.

Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until
the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
Notice
.

When using concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer instructions for
adding water.

.

Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-18
.

.

Black plate (18,1)

Vehicle Care

Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for
fluid expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage
the tank if it is
completely full.
Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the
windshield washer system
and paint.

Brakes
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.

The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
a crash. When the brake wear
warning sound is heard, have the
vehicle serviced.

Brake Pedal Travel

Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.

Brake Adjustment

Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2.

See your dealer if the brake pedal
does not return to normal height,
or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service might be
required.
Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
new, approved replacement parts.
If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example,

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (19,1)

Vehicle Care
installing disc brake pads that are
wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front and
rear brakes — for the worse. The
braking performance expected can
change in many other ways if the
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.

There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
.

The brake fluid level goes down
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.

Brake Fluid

.

A fluid leak in the brake/clutch
hydraulic system can also cause
a low fluid level. Have the brake/
clutch hydraulic system fixed,
since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not
work well.

The brake/clutch master cylinder
reservoir is filled with DOT 4 brake
fluid as indicated on the reservoir
cap. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6 for the
location of the reservoir.

Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done
on the brake/clutch hydraulic
system.

10-19

{ WARNING
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn,
if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake/clutch
hydraulic system.

Checking Brake Fluid
The brake/clutch fluid can be
checked without taking off the cap
by looking at the brake/clutch fluid
reservoir.
The fluid level should be above
MIN. If it is not, have the brake/
clutch hydraulic system checked to
see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake/
clutch hydraulic system, make sure
the level is above MIN but not over
the MAX mark.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-20

Black plate (20,1)

Vehicle Care

When the brake/clutch fluid falls to a
low level, the brake warning light
comes on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 5‑14.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 4 brake fluid
from a sealed container. It is
recommended that the brake/clutch
hydraulic system be flushed and
refilled with new DOT 4 fluid at a
regular maintenance service every
two years. See the Maintenance
Schedule booklet and
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑12.

{ WARNING
With the wrong kind of fluid in the
brake/clutch hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake/clutch fluid.
Notice
.

Always clean the brake/clutch fluid
reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.
.

Using the wrong fluid can
badly damage brake/clutch
hydraulic system parts. For
example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in the brake
hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
If brake fluid is spilled on the
vehicle's painted surfaces,
the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to

spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.

Battery
Refer to the replacement number
shown on the original battery label
when a new battery is needed. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for battery location.

{ WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (21,1)

Vehicle Care
Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑63 for tips on working
around a battery without
getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑26.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each
gear. The vehicle should start
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).

10-21

If the vehicle starts in any other
position, contact your dealer for
service.

Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control
Function Check

{ WARNING
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑26.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-22

Black plate (22,1)

Vehicle Care

3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition on, but do not start the
engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the
shift lever out of P (Park) with
normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
your dealer for service.

Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check

{ WARNING
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.

Ignition Transmission
Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.
.

.

The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park).
The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service is
required.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
.

To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.

.

To check the P (Park)
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.

Contact your dealer if service is
required.

Wiper Blade Replacement
Front Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected for wear or cracking. See
Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑2.
Replacement blades come in
different types and are removed in
different ways. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and
type, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11‑13.
Notice: Allowing the wiper arm to
touch the windshield when no
wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (23,1)

Vehicle Care
damage that occurs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not
allow the wiper arm to touch the
windshield.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

To replace the windshield wiper
blade:

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

4. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiper
blade replacement.

1. Pull the windshield wiper
assembly away from the
windshield.

1. Pull the wiper arm (1) a short
distance away from the glass.
2. Push the blade (2) away from
the arm (1).

2. Press the button (2) in the
middle of the wiper arm
connector, and pull the wiper
blade away from the arm
connector (1).

3. Once the blade pin disengages
from the wiper arm, remove the
wiper blade by sliding the blade
off the arm.
4. Reverse the steps to install the
new blade.

10-23

Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset and
should need no further adjustment.
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,
the headlamp aim may be affected.
If adjustment to the headlamps is
necessary, see your dealer.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-24

Black plate (24,1)

Vehicle Care

Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 10‑27.
For any bulb‐changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.

Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal and Parking
Lamps
High/Low-Beam Headlamp

3. Disconnect the wiring harness
connector from the bulb (3) by
pressing the connector
release (2) and pulling
straight back.
4. Remove the bulb (3) from the
headlamp assembly by turning
counterclockwise and pulling
straight back.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.

2. Remove the connector
retaining tab (1).

5. Install the new bulb in the
headlamp assembly by turning
clockwise.

1. Connector Retaining Tab
2. Connector Release
3. Headlamp Bulb
To replace a headlamp bulb:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑4.

6. Install the wiring harness
connector to the bulb. Be sure
the connector release (2) locks
into place.
7. Install the connector
retaining tab (1).

Front Turn Signal/Parking
Lamps
To replace a front turn signal bulb:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑4.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (25,1)

Vehicle Care

Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lamp bulb:
1. Locate the fog lamp under the
front fascia.

10-25

Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Lamps

2. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the fog lamp bulb
assembly.
3. Remove the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it
straight out of the assembly.
2. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull it out
of the lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the
bulb socket.
4. Install the new bulb into the
socket by pressing it in.
5. Install the socket into the lamp
housing by turning it clockwise.

4. Install the new bulb by turning it
clockwise into the assembly.
5. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall.
1. Stoplamp/Taillamp
2. Turn Signal Lamp
3. Back-up Lamp
To replace a taillamp, turn signal
lamp, stoplamp, or back-up bulb:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
on page 2‑7.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-26

Black plate (26,1)

Vehicle Care
7. Reinstall the lamp assembly and
two screws.

License Plate Lamp

3. Turn the bulb socket (3)
counterclockwise and pull it out
of the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out of
the socket.
5. Push the new bulb into the
socket.
6. Install the bulb socket (3) by
turning clockwise into the license
plate lamp assembly.
7. Replace the license plate lamp
assembly by using the two
screws to secure.

2. Remove the two screws and the
lamp assembly.
3. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove
the socket.
4. Press the bulb in and turn
counterclockwise to remove it
from the socket.
5. Press the new bulb in and turn
clockwise to install the bulb into
the socket.
6. Turn the bulb socket clockwise
to reinstall.

1. Attachment Screws
2. License Plate Bulb
3. Bulb Socket
To replace a license plate
lamp bulb:
1. Remove the two screws (1) from
the license plate lamp assembly.
2. Turn and pull the license plate
lamp assembly down.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (27,1)

Vehicle Care

Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up Lamps
Front Turn Signal/
Parking Lamps
High/Low-Beam
Headlamp

Bulb
Number
921
7444NA
H13

License
Plate Lamp

W5W LL

Rear Turn Signal/
Taillamps

7443 LL

Stoplamp/
Taillamps

7443 LL

For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer.

Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed. This
greatly reduces the chance of circuit
overload and fire caused by
electrical problems.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
power devices in the vehicle.
Replace a bad fuse with a new one
of the identical size and rating.
If there is a problem on the road and
a fuse needs to be replaced, the
same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.

10-27

Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have the
headlamp wiring checked right away
if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.

Windshield Wipers
If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice may
cause wiper linkage damage.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using the
windshield wipers.
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-28

Black plate (28,1)

Vehicle Care

Fuses and Circuit
Breakers

Engine Compartment
Fuse Block

The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses, circuit
breakers, and fusible thermal links.
This greatly reduces the chance of
fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band
inside the fuse. If the band is broken
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can
be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
you can.

The engine compartment fuse block
is on the driver side of the vehicle,
near the battery.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
To access the fuses, press the tab
at the front of the cover, and lift the
cover.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (29,1)

Vehicle Care

10-29

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-30

Black plate (30,1)

Vehicle Care

The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Number
Usage

Number

Usage

14

Headlamp
High Left

1

Windshield Washer

15

Headlamp High
Right

2

Rear Window
Washer Relay

16

Fan Low

3

Windshield Washer
Relay

17

Antilock Brake
System 2

4

Horn Relay

18

Not Used

5

Fan High Relay

19

Spare Fuse

6

Fan Low Relay

20

Front Fog Relay

7

Antilock Brake
System 1

21

Headlamp High
Relay

8

Horn

22

Fuel Pump Relay

9

Not Used

23

Not Used

10

Not Used

24

Spare Fuse

11

Spare Fuse

25

Antilock Brake
System 3

12

Fan High

26

EMIS 2

13

Front Fog

27

Canister

28

Fuel Pump

Number

Usage

29

Front Wiper

30

Front Wiper
Control Relay

31

Spare Fuse

32

Starter

33

Ignition

34

EMIS 1

35

Not Used

36

Not Used

37

Front Wiper Speed
Relay

38

Not Used

39

Start Relay

40

Engine Relay

41

RUN/CRANK
Relay

42

Interior Electrical
Center

43

Not Used

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (31,1)

Vehicle Care
Number

Usage

44

Air Conditioning
Relay

45

Air Conditioning

46

ECM/TCM 1

47

ECM/TCM 2

48

Low Vacuum
Switch

49

Automatic
Occupant Sensing

50

Mirror Heater

51

Rear Defog

52

Fuse Puller

53

Not Used

54

Voltage Sensing

55

Rear Wiper

56

Rear Wiper

57

Rear Defog Relay

10-31

Auxiliary Fuse Block

The auxiliary fuse block is located
on the driver side of the vehicle,
near the battery.
To access the fuses, press the tab
at the side of the cover, and lift the
cover.

The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Number
Usage
EVP RELAY

EVP Relay

EVP MTR

EVP Motor

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-32

Black plate (32,1)

Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel Fuse
Block

Open the fuse panel door by pulling
out at the top.
The instrument panel fuse block is
on the underside of the driver side
instrument panel.

Remove the fuse panel door
diagonally.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (33,1)

Vehicle Care
Number

The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.

Usage

1

Not Used

2

Not Used

3

Heater, Ventilation,
and Air
Conditioning
Switch

Number

10-33

Usage

15

Rear Parking
Assist

16

Body Control
Module 1

17

Body Control
Module 2

18

Body Control
Module 3

19

Body Control
Module 6

4

Heated Seat

5

Not Used

6

Blower

7

Body Control
Module 4

20

Body Control
Module 8

8

Body Control
Module 5

21

9

Body Control
Module 7

Heater, Ventilation,
and Air
Conditioning

22

10

Instrument Cluster

Data Link
Connector

11

Not Used

23

12

Air Bag Power

Discrete Logic
Ignition Sensor

13

Radio

24

Outside Rearview
Mirror

14

Not Used

25

Spare Fuse

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-34

Black plate (34,1)

Vehicle Care

Number

Usage

Number

Usage

26

Not Used

40

OnStar

27

Not Used

41

Spare Fuse

28

Instrument Cluster

42

Spare Fuse

29

Air Bag Ignition

43

Spare Fuse

30

Rear Window

44

Spare Fuse

31

Front Window

45

Spare Fuse

32

Lighter/Auxiliary
Power Outlet

46

Spare Fuse

33

Not Used

34

Run Relay

35

Logic Mode Relay

36

Accessory/
Retained
Accessory Power
Relay

37

Not Used

38

Radio

39

Heater, Ventilation,
and Air
Conditioning

Wheels and Tires
Tires
Every new GM vehicle has
high-quality tires made by a
leading tire manufacturer. See
the warranty manual for
information regarding the tire
warranty and where to get
service. For additional
information refer to the tire
manufacturer.

{ WARNING
.

Poorly maintained and
improperly used tires are
dangerous.

.

Overloading the tires can
cause overheating as a result
of too much flexing. There
could be a blowout and a
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑9.
(Continued)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (35,1)

Vehicle Care
WARNING (CONTINUED)
.

.

Underinflated tires pose the
same danger as overloaded
tires. The resulting crash
could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when the
tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
or broken by a sudden impact
— such as when hitting a
pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.

.

Worn or old tires can cause a
crash. If the tread is badly
worn, replace them.

.

Replace any tires that have
been damaged by impacts
with potholes, curbs, etc.
(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)
.

.

Improperly repaired tires can
cause a crash. Only the
dealer or an authorized tire
service center should repair,
replace, dismount, and mount
the tires.
Do not spin the tires in
excess of 56 km/h (35 mph)
on slippery surfaces such as
snow, mud, ice, etc.
Excessive spinning may
cause the tires to explode.

All-Season Tires
This vehicle may come with
all-season tires. These tires are
designed to provide good overall
performance on most road surfaces
and weather conditions. Original
equipment tires designed to GM's
specific tire performance criteria
have a TPC specification code
molded onto the sidewall. Original
equipment all-season tires can be

10-35

identified by the last two characters
of this TPC code, which will
be “MS.”
Consider installing winter tires on
the vehicle if frequent driving on
snow or ice-covered roads is
expected. All-season tires provide
adequate performance for most
winter driving conditions, but they
may not offer the same level of
traction or performance as winter
tires on snow or ice-covered roads.
See Winter Tires on page 10‑35.

Winter Tires
This vehicle was not, originally,
equipped with winter tires. Winter
tires are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice-covered
roads. Consider installing winter
tires on the vehicle if frequent
driving on snow or ice-covered
roads is expected. See your dealer
for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection.
Also, see Buying New Tires on
page 10‑48.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-36

Black plate (36,1)

Vehicle Care

With winter tires, there may be
decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter
tread life. After changing to winter
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
handling and braking.
If using winter tires:
.

Use tires of the same brand and
tread type on all four wheel
positions.

.

Use only radial ply tires of the
same size, load range, and
speed rating as the original
equipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed
rating as the original equipment tires
may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
tires with a lower speed rating are
chosen, never exceed the tire's
maximum speed capability.

Summer Tires
This vehicle may come with high
performance summer tires. These
tires have a special tread and
compound that are optimized for
maximum dry and wet road
performance. This special tread and
compound will decrease
performance in cold climates, and
on ice and snow. We recommend
installing winter tires on the vehicle
if frequent driving in cold
temperatures or on snow or ice
covered roads is expected. See
Winter Tires on page 10‑35.

Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is
molded into its sidewall. The
examples show a typical
passenger tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size: The tire size is a
combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(2) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (37,1)

Vehicle Care
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(3) DOT (Department of
Transportation): The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that the
tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
DOT Tire Date of
Manufacture: The last four
digits of the TIN indicate the tire
manufactured date. The first two
digits represent the week
(01-52) and the last two digits,
the year. For example, the third
week of the year 2010 would
have a four-digit DOT date
of 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT code are the
Tire Identification Number (TIN).
The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(5) Tire Ply Material : The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(6) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to
grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 10‑50.

10-37

(7) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load that
can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.

Tire Designations
Tire Size
The following is an example of a
typical passenger vehicle
tire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-38

Black plate (38,1)

Vehicle Care

vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(2) Tire Width: The three-digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit
number that indicates the tire
height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item 3 of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
(4) Construction Code: A letter
code is used to indicate the type
of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply
construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B
means belted-bias ply
construction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
(6) Service Description: These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carrying capacity a tire
is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
or psi (pounds per square inch).
Accessory Weight: The
combined weight of optional
accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are
automatic transmission, power

steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords between the plies and the
tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at
alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in kPa (kilopascal)
or psi (pounds per square inch)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (39,1)

Vehicle Care
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 10‑41.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the front axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑9.

Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the rear axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑9.

DOT Markings: A code molded
into the sidewall of a tire
signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑9.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and
some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.

10-39

Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The
load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight: The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑9.
Occupant Distribution :
Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-40

Black plate (40,1)

Vehicle Care

outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑41 and
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑9.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An
alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with
the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the tread
of a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/
16 in) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 10‑47.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards): A tire
information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a
tire's traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire
manufacturers using
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on
page 10‑50.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The
number of designated seating
positions multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑9.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (41,1)

Vehicle Care
.

Premature or
irregular wear.

.

Poor handling.

.

Reduced fuel economy.

10-41

.

Unusual wear.

Tire Pressure

.

Poor handling.

For additional information
regarding how much weight the
vehicle can carry, and an
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑9. How
the vehicle is loaded affects
vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load the vehicle
with more weight than it was
designed to carry.

Tires need the correct amount of
air pressure to operate
effectively.

.

Rough ride.

When to Check

.

Needless damage from
road hazards.

Check the tires once a month
or more.

Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle
capacity weight and the original
equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure.
See “Tire and Loading
Information Label” under Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑9.

Notice: Neither tire
underinflation nor
overinflation is good.
Underinflated tires, or tires
that do not have enough air,
can result in:
.

Tire overloading and
overheating which could
lead to a blowout.

Overinflated tires, or tires that
have too much air, can
result in:

The Tire and Loading
Information label on the vehicle
indicates the original equipment
tires and the correct cold tire
inflation pressures. The
recommended pressure is the
minimum air pressure needed to
support the vehicle's maximum
load carrying capacity.

How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check the tire
pressure. Proper tire inflation
cannot be determined by looking
at the tire. Check the tire
inflation pressure when the tires
are cold, meaning the vehicle

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-42

Black plate (42,1)

Vehicle Care

has not been driven for at least
three hours or no more than
1.6 km (1 mi).
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the tire
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get the pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.

Tire Pressure Monitor
System

pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly
under-inflated.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your tires and
transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.

Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping
ability.

If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until the recommended
pressure is reached. If the
inflation pressure in high, press
on the metal stem in the center
of the tire valve to release air.
Re‐check the tire pressure with
the tire gauge.

Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)

Return the valve caps on the
valve stems to keep out dirt and
moisture and prevent leaks.

As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (43,1)

Vehicle Care
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑43.

10-43

Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada
Standards
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑15 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire
and wheel assembly. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in
the tires and transmit the tire
pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument cluster.
If the warning light comes on, stop
as soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑9.
The low tire pressure warning light
comes on at each drive cycle until
the tires are inflated to the correct
inflation pressure.
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
could be an early indicator that the
air pressure is getting low and must
be inflated to the proper pressure.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-44

Black plate (44,1)

Vehicle Care

A Tire and Loading Information label
shows the size of the original
equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for the tires when
they are cold. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑9, for an example
of the Tire and Loading Information
label and its location. Also see Tire
Pressure on page 10‑41.
The TPMS can warn about a low
tire pressure condition but it does
not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 10‑46, Tire Rotation on
page 10‑46 and Tires on
page 10‑34.
Notice: Tire sealant materials are
not all the same. A non-approved
tire sealant could damage the
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor
damage caused by using an
incorrect tire sealant is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use only the
GM-approved tire sealant
available through your dealer or
included in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits
use a GM-approved liquid tire
sealant. Using non-approved tire
sealants could damage the TPMS
sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10‑54 for
information regarding the inflator kit
materials and instructions.

is replaced and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
Matching Process" later in this
section.
.

The TPMS sensor matching
process was not done or not
completed successfully after
rotating the tires. The
malfunction light should go off
after successfully completing the
sensor matching process. See
"TPMS Sensor Matching
Process" later in this section.

.

One or more TPMS sensors are
missing or damaged. The
malfunction light should go off
when the TPMS sensors are
installed and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See your dealer for
service.

.

Replacement tires or wheels do
not match the original equipment
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
other than those recommended

TPMS Malfunction Light
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for
about one minute and then stays on
for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. The malfunction light comes
on at each ignition cycle until the
problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause this to
come on are:
.

One of the road tires has been
replaced with the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one. The spare
tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The malfunction light
should go off after the road tire

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (45,1)

Vehicle Care
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
New Tires on page 10‑48.
.

Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning
properly, it cannot detect or signal a
low tire condition. See your dealer
for service if the TPMS malfunction
light comes on and stays on.

TPMS Sensor Matching
Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. The identification
code needs to be matched to a new
tire/wheel position after rotating the
tires or replacing one or more of the
TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor
matching process should also be
performed after replacing a spare
tire with a road tire containing the
TPMS sensor. The malfunction light
should go off at the next ignition
cycle. The sensors are matched to

the tire/wheel positions, using a
TPMS relearn tool, in the following
order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear.
See your dealer for service or to
purchase a relearn tool.
There are two minutes to match the
first tire/wheel position, and
five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes
longer, the matching process stops
and must be restarted.
The TPMS sensor matching
process is:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
3. Press the MENU button and
select Menu 2 in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
4. Press the up or down arrow to
scroll to the Tire Learn menu
screen.

10-45

5. Press and hold the SET/CLR
button to begin the sensor
matching process.
A message displays confirming
to begin the process.
6. Use the arrow buttons to select
YES with the highlighted
selection, and press the SET/
CLR button again to confirm the
selection.
The horn sounds twice to signal
the receiver is in relearn mode
and the Tire Learn message
displays on the DIC screen.
7. Start with the driver side
front tire.
8. Place the relearn tool against
the tire sidewall, near the valve
stem. Then press the button to
activate the TPMS sensor.
A horn chirp confirms that the
sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and
wheel position.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-46

Black plate (46,1)

Vehicle Care

9. Proceed to the passenger side
front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 8.
10. Proceed to the passenger side
rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 8.
11. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat the procedure
in Step 8. The horn sounds two
times to indicate the sensor
identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear
tire, and the TPMS sensor
matching process is no longer
active. The TIRE LEARN
message on the DIC display
screen goes off.

Tire Inspection
We recommend that the tires,
including the spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, be inspected
for signs of wear or damage at
least once a month.
Replace the tire if:
.

The indicators at three or
more places around the tire
can be seen.

.

There is cord or fabric
showing through the tire's
rubber.

.

The tread or sidewall is
cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or
fabric.

.

The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.

12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
13. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.

.

The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot
be repaired well because of
the size or location of the
damage.

Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km (7,500 mi). The first
rotation is the most important.
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑2.
Tires are rotated to achieve a
more uniform wear for all tires.
Anytime unusual wear is
noticed, rotate the tires as soon
as possible, check for proper tire
inflation pressure, and check for
damaged tires or wheels. If the
unusual wear continues after the
rotation, check the wheel
alignment. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 10‑47
and Wheel Replacement on
page 10‑52.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (47,1)

Vehicle Care
Check that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities
and Specifications on
page 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Adjust the front and rear tires to
the recommended inflation
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label after
the tires have been rotated. See
Tire Pressure on page 10‑41
and Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑9.

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on
the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel
nuts become loose after a
time. The wheel could come
off and cause a crash. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where
the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, a
cloth or a paper towel can be
used, however, use a scraper
or wire brush to remove all
rust or dirt.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on
page 10‑43.

Lightly coat the center of the
wheel hub with wheel bearing
grease after a wheel change or

Use this rotation pattern when
rotating the tires.

10-47

tire rotation to prevent corrosion
or rust build-up. Do not get
grease on the flat wheel
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for New
Tires
Factors such as maintenance,
temperatures, driving speeds,
vehicle loading, and road conditions
affect the wear rate of the tires.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-48

Black plate (48,1)

Vehicle Care

Treadwear indicators are one way to
tell when it is time for new tires.
Treadwear indicators appear when
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
or less of tread remaining. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑46 and Tire
Rotation on page 10‑46.
The rubber in tires ages over time.
This also applies to the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
never used. Multiple factors
including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure
maintenance affect how fast aging
takes place. GM recommends that
tires, including the spare if
equipped, be replaced after six
years, regardless of tread wear. The
tire manufacturer date is the last
four digits of the DOT Tire
Identification Number (TIN) which is
molded into one side of the tire
sidewall. The first two digits
represent the week (01–52) and the
last two digits, the year. For
example, the third week of the year
2010 would have a four-digit DOT
date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage
Tires age when stored normally
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
a vehicle that will be stored for at
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
area away from direct sunlight to
slow aging. This area should be free
of grease, gasoline, or other
substances that can deteriorate
rubber.
Parking for an extended period can
cause flat spots on the tires that
may result in vibrations while
driving. When storing a vehicle for
at least a month, remove the tires or
raise the vehicle to reduce the
weight from the tires.

Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for the vehicle. The
original equipment tires installed
were designed to meet General
Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec)
system rating. When

replacement tires are needed,
GM strongly recommends
buying tires with the same TPC
Spec rating.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec
system considers over a dozen
critical specifications that impact
the overall performance of the
vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring
performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire's
sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC spec number
will be followed by MS, for mud
and snow. See Tire Sidewall
Labeling on page 10‑36.
GM recommends replacing worn
tires in complete sets of four.
Uniform tread depth on all tires
will help to maintain the
performance of the vehicle.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (49,1)

Vehicle Care
Braking and handling
performance may be adversely
affected if all the tires are not
replaced at the same time.
If proper rotation and
maintenance have been done,
all four tires should wear out at
about the same time. See Tire
Rotation on page 10‑46 for
information on proper tire
rotation. However, if it is
necessary to replace only one
axle set of worn tires, place the
new tires on the rear axle.
Winter tires with the same speed
rating as the original equipment
tires may not be available for H,
V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated
tires. Never exceed the winter
tire's maximum speed capability
when using winter tires with a
lower speed rating.

{ WARNING

10-49

{ WARNING

Tires could explode during
improper service. Attempting
to mount or dismount a tire
could cause injury or death.
Only your dealer or authorized
tire service center should
mount or dismount the tires.

Using bias-ply tires on the
vehicle may cause the wheel
rim flanges to develop cracks
after many miles of driving.
A tire and/or wheel could fail
suddenly and cause a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle tires must be
replaced with a tire that does not
have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating, and
construction (radial) as the
original tires.

Mixing tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may cause
loss of control of the vehicle,
resulting in a crash or other
vehicle damage. Use the
correct size, brand, and type
of tire on all wheels.

Vehicles that have a tire
pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
low-pressure warning if non-TPC
Spec rated tires are installed.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10‑42.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-50

Black plate (50,1)

Vehicle Care

The Tire and Loading
Information Label indicates the
original equipment tires on the
vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑9, for the label
location and more information
about the Tire and Loading
Information label.

Different Size Tires and
Wheels
If wheels or tires are installed that
are a different size than the original
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
performance, including its braking,
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover
may be affected. If the vehicle has
electronic systems such as antilock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, and electronic stability
control, the performance of these
systems can also be affected.

{ WARNING
If different sized wheels are used,
there may not be an acceptable
level of performance and safety if
tires not recommended for those
wheels are selected. This
increases the chance of a crash
and serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems
developed for the vehicle, and
have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on
page 10‑48 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 10‑3.

Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires by
treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This
applies only to vehicles sold in
the United States. The grades
are molded on the sidewalls of
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter tires,
compact spare tires, tires with

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (51,1)

Vehicle Care
nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production
tires.
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars
and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they
must also conform to federal
safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
All Passenger Car Tires Must
Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test
course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one and
one-half (1½) times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and
differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on

10-51

straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade
C corresponds to a level of
performance which all
passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-52

Black plate (52,1)

Vehicle Care

performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to
provide the longest tire life and best
overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing
will not be necessary on a regular
basis. However, check the
alignment if there is unusual tire
wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
one side or the other. If the vehicle
vibrates when driving on a smooth

road, the tires and wheels might
need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it.
Some aluminum wheels can be
repaired. See your dealer if any of
these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of
wheel that is needed.
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the one it
replaces.
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) sensors with new
GM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts can be dangerous. It could
affect the braking and handling of
the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
and cause loss of control, causing
a crash. Always use the correct
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire
or tire chain clearance to the
body and chassis.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (53,1)

Vehicle Care
Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING
Replacing a wheel with a used
one is dangerous. How it has
been used or how far it has been
driven may be unknown. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash.
When replacing wheels, use a
new GM original equipment
wheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
suspension, or other vehicle
(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)
parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause loss of
control and a crash.
Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for the vehicle's
tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions. To
avoid vehicle damage, drive slow
and readjust or remove the
traction device if it contacts the
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels.
If traction devices are used, install
them on the front tires.

10-53

If a Tire Goes Flat
This vehicle has a tire sealant and
compressor kit. See Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit on page 10‑54.
There is no spare tire, no tire
changing equipment, and no place
to store a tire.
It is unusual for a tire to blow out,
especially if the tires are maintained
properly. See Tires on page 10‑34.
air goes out of a tire, it is much
more likely to leak out slowly. But if
there is ever a blowout, here are a
few tips about what to expect and
what to do.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will
create a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop, well off the
road, if possible.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction as
used in a skid. Stop pressing the

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-54

Black plate (54,1)

Vehicle Care

accelerator pedal and steer to
straighten the vehicle. It may be
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road,
if possible.

{ WARNING
Driving on a flat tire will cause
permanent damage to the tire.
Re-inflating a tire after it has been
driven on while severely
underinflated or flat may cause a
blowout and a serious crash.
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
that has been driven on while
severely underinflated or flat.
Have your dealer or an authorized
tire service center repair or
replace the flat tire as soon as
possible.

{ WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs is
dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place, well off the road,
if possible.
1. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers. See Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 6‑3.
2. Park the vehicle. Set the parking
brake firmly and put the shift
lever in P (Park). See Shifting
Into Park on page 9‑17.

3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a puncture larger than a
6 mm (0.25 in), the tire is too
severely damaged for the tire
sealant and compressor kit to be
effective.
If the tire has a puncture less than a
6 mm (0.25 in) in the tread area of
the tire, see Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10‑54.

Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit

{ WARNING
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
(Continued)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (55,1)

Vehicle Care
WARNING (CONTINUED)
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑21.

{ WARNING
Overinflating a tire could cause
the tire to rupture and you or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the tire sealant
and compressor kit instructions
and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not
exceed the recommended
pressure.

{ WARNING
Storing the tire sealant and
compressor kit or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store the tire
sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.

10-55

If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire
sealant and compressor kit to be
effective. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 13‑5.
Read and follow all of the tire
sealant and compressor kit
instructions.
The kit includes:

If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire or tire changing
equipment, and on some vehicles
there may not be a place to store
a tire.
The tire sealant and compressor
can be used to temporarily seal
punctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) in
the tread area of the tire. It can also
be used to inflate an
underinflated tire.

1. Sealant Canister Inlet Valve
2. Sealant/Air Hose
3. Base of Sealant Canister

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-56

Black plate (56,1)

Vehicle Care

4. Tire Sealant Canister
5. On/Off Button
6. Slot on Top of Compressor
7. Pressure Gauge

Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the tire sealant canister.
The tire sealant canister (4) should
be replaced before its expiration
date. Replacement tire sealant
canisters are available at your local
dealer.
There is only enough sealant to seal
one tire. After usage, the tire sealant
canister must be replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit to Temporarily
Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire

8. Pressure Deflation Button
9. Power Plug
10. Air Only Hose

Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling
instructions on the label adhered to
the tire sealant canister (4).

When using the tire sealant and
compressor kit during cold
temperatures, warm the kit in a
heated environment for five minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire
faster.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑3.

See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑53 for other important
safety warnings.
Do not remove any objects that
have penetrated the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant
canister (4) and compressor
from its storage location. See
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10‑62.
2. Remove the air only hose (10)
and the power plug (9) from the
bottom of the compressor.
3. Place the compressor on the
ground near the flat tire.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (57,1)

Vehicle Care

4. Attach the air only hose (10) to
the sealant canister inlet
valve (1) by turning it clockwise
until tight.

5. Slide the base of the tire sealant
canister (3) into the slot on the
top of the compressor (6) to hold
it upright.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
6. Remove the valve stem cap from
the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.

10-57

7. Attach the sealant/air hose (2) to
the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until tight.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-58

Black plate (58,1)

Vehicle Care

8. Plug the power plug (9) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
9. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
10. Press the on/off button (5) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit on.
The compressor will inject
sealant and air into the tire.
The pressure gauge (7) will
initially show a high pressure
while the compressor pushes
the sealant into the tire. Once
the sealant is completely
dispersed into the tire, the

pressure will quickly drop and
start to rise again as the tire
inflates with air only.
11. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure
gauge (7). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑41.
The pressure gauge (7) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may
be turned on/off until the
correct pressure is reached.
Notice: If the recommended
pressure cannot be reached after
approximately 25 minutes, the
vehicle should not be driven
farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the
tire. Remove the power plug from

the accessory power outlet and
unscrew the inflating hose from
the tire valve. See Roadside
Assistance Program on
page 13‑5.
12. Press the on/off button (5) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
The tire is not sealed and will
continue to leak air until the
vehicle is driven and the
sealant is distributed in the tire.
Therefore, Steps 13–21 must
be done immediately after
Step 12.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor kit
as it could be warm after
usage.
13. Unplug the power plug (9) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
14. Turn the sealant/air hose (2)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the tire valve stem.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (59,1)

Vehicle Care
15. Replace the tire valve
stem cap.
16. Remove the tire sealant
canister (4) from the slot on top
of the compressor (6).
17. Turn the air only hose (10)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the tire sealant canister
inlet valve (1).
18. Turn the sealant/air hose (2)
clockwise onto the sealant
canister inlet valve (1) to
prevent sealant leakage.
19. Return the air only hose (10)
and power plug (9) back to
their original storage location.

20. If the flat tire was able to inflate
to the recommended inflation
pressure, remove the
maximum speed label from the
sealant canister and place it in
a highly visible location.
Do not exceed the speed on
this label until the damaged tire
is repaired or replaced.
21. Return the equipment to its
original storage location in the
vehicle.
22. Immediately drive the vehicle
8 km (5 mi) to distribute the
sealant in the tire.

10-59

23. Stop at a safe location and
check the tire pressure. Refer
to Steps 1–10 under “Using the
Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a
Tire (Not Punctured).”
If the tire pressure has fallen
more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
below the recommended
inflation pressure, stop driving
the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire
sealant cannot seal the tire.
See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 13‑5.
If the tire pressure has not
dropped more than 68 kPa
(10 psi) from the recommended
inflation pressure, inflate the
tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-60

Black plate (60,1)

Vehicle Care

24. Wipe off any sealant from the
wheel, tire, or vehicle.
25. Dispose of the used tire
sealant canister (4) at a local
dealer or in accordance with
local state codes and practices.

Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not
Punctured)
The kit includes:

26. Replace it with a new canister
available from your dealer.
27. After temporarily sealing a tire
using the tire sealant and
compressor kit, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer
within 161 km (100 mi) of
driving to have the tire repaired
or replaced.

8. Pressure Deflation Button
9. Power Plug
10. Air Only Hose

1. Sealant Canister Inlet Valve
2. Sealant/Air Hose
3. Base of Sealant Canister
4. Tire Sealant Canister
5. On/Off Button
6. Slot on Top of Compressor
7. Pressure Gauge

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑3.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑53 for other important
safety warnings.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (61,1)

Vehicle Care
1. Remove the compressor from its
storage location. See Storing the
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
on page 10‑62.
2. Remove the air only hose (10)
and the power plug (9) from the
bottom of the compressor.
3. Place the compressor on the
ground near the flat tire.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.

6. Plug the power plug (9) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.

4. Remove the valve stem cap from
the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.

5. Attach the air only hose (10) to
the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until tight.

8. Press the on/off button (5) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit on.
The compressor will inflate the
tire with air only.

10-61

9. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gauge (7).
The recommended inflation
pressure can be found on the
Tire and Loading Information
label. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑41.
The pressure gauge (7) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor is
on. Turn the compressor off to
get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may
be turned on/off until the correct
pressure is reached.
If the tire is inflated higher than
the recommended pressure,
adjust the excess pressure by
pressing the pressure deflation
button (8) until the proper
pressure reading is reached.
This option is only functional
when using the air only
hose (10).

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-62

Black plate (62,1)

Vehicle Care

Notice: If the recommended
pressure cannot be reached after
approximately 25 minutes, the
vehicle should not be driven
farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the
tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and
unscrew the inflating hose from
the tire valve. See Roadside
Assistance Program on
page 13‑5.
10. Press the on/off button (5) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
Be careful while handling the
compressor as it could be
warm after usage.
11. Unplug the power plug (9) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
12. Turn the air only hose (10)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the tire valve stem.

13. Replace the tire valve
stem cap.
14. Return the air only hose (10)
and power plug (9) back to
their original storage location.
15. Return the equipment to its
original storage location in the
vehicle.
The tire sealant and compressor kit
has accessory adapters located in a
compartment on the bottom of its
housing that can be used to inflate
air mattresses, balls, etc.

Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit
The tire sealant and compressor kit
is located in the rear storage area.
1. Lift the trim cover.

2. Remove the tire sealant
canister (1) and the
compressor (2).
To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the steps.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (63,1)

Vehicle Care

Jump Starting
For more information about the
vehicle battery, see Battery on
page 10‑20.
If the battery has run down, try to
use another vehicle and some
jumper cables to start your vehicle.
Be sure to use the following steps to
do it safely.

Notice: Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage to
the vehicle that would not be
covered by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not
work, and it could damage the
vehicle.

10-63

The jump start positive post is in the
engine compartment on the driver
side of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6.
The jump start negative post is the
engine block or an engine mounting
bolt. Connect to a spot as far away
from the discharged battery as
possible.
The jump start positive post and
negative post are on the battery of
the vehicle providing the jump start.

{ WARNING
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
.

They contain acid that can
burn you.

The positive jump start connection
for the discharged battery is under a
trim cover. Open the cover to
expose the post.

.

They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.

These locations are used instead of
a direct connection to the battery.

.

They contain enough
electricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.

1. Discharged Battery Negative
Grounding Point
2. Discharged Battery Positive Post
3. Good Battery Positive Post
4. Good Battery Negative Post

1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
Notice: Only use a vehicle that
has a 12-volt system with a
negative ground for jump
starting. If the other vehicle does

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-64

Black plate (64,1)

Vehicle Care

not have a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles
can be damaged.
2. Position the two vehicles so that
they are not touching.
3. Set the parking brake firmly and
put the shift lever in P (Park)
with an automatic transmission,
or Neutral with a manual
transmission. See Shifting Into
Park on page 9‑17 with an
automatic transmission,
or Parking on page 9‑20 with a
manual transmission.
Notice: If any accessories are left
on or plugged in during the jump
starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Whenever possible,
turn off or unplug all accessories
on either vehicle when jump
starting the vehicle.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Turn off all lights and
accessories in both vehicles,
except the hazard warning
flashers if needed.

{ WARNING
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING
Using a match near a battery can
cause battery gas to explode.
People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.
Use a flashlight if you need more
light.
(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that
first. If you do not, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.

{ WARNING
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (65,1)

Vehicle Care
5. Connect one end of the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) post (2) on the
discharged battery.
6. Connect the other end of the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) post (3) of the good
battery.
7. Connect one end of the black
negative (–) cable to the
negative (–) post (4) of the good
battery.
8. Connect the other end of the
black negative (–) cable to the
negative (–) grounding point (1)
for the discharged battery.
9. Start the engine in the vehicle
with the good battery and run
the engine at idle speed for at
least four minutes.
10. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or
other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
Reverse the sequence exactly when
removing the jumper cables.

10-65

Towing
Towing the Vehicle
Notice: Incorrectly towing a
disabled vehicle may cause
damage. The damage would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed
car carrier or a wheel lift tow truck.
If a wheel lift tow truck is used, the
drive wheels cannot contact the
road while the vehicle is being
towed. A wheel dolly must be used
to lift all drive wheels off the ground.
Consult your dealer or a
professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed.
To tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes,
such as behind a motor home, see
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this
section.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-66

Black plate (66,1)

Vehicle Care

Recreational Vehicle
Towing
Recreational vehicle towing refers to
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle – such as behind a motor
home. The two most common types
of recreational vehicle towing are
known as dinghy towing and dolly
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground. Dolly towing is towing the
vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
.

The towing capacity of the
towing vehicle. Be sure to read
the tow vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.

.

How far the vehicle will be
towed. Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.

.

The proper towing equipment.
See your dealer or trailering
professional for additional advice
and equipment
recommendations.

.

If the vehicle is ready to be
towed. Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make sure
the vehicle is prepared to be
towed.

Dinghy Towing (With
Automatic Transmission)

Notice: If the vehicle is towed
with all four wheels on the
ground, the drivetrain
components could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
tow the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
Vehicles with an automatic
transmission should not be towed
with all four wheels on the ground.
If the vehicle must be towed, a dolly
should be used. See "Dolly Towing"
that follows for more information.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (67,1)

Vehicle Care
Dinghy Towing (With Manual
Transmission)

To dinghy tow the vehicle from the
front with all four wheels on the
ground:
1. Position the vehicle to tow and
then secure it to the towing
vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission to Neutral.
3. Turn the ignition to ACC/
ACCESSORY.

Notice: If 89 km/h (55 mph) is
exceeded while towing the
vehicle, it could be damaged.
Never exceed 89 km/h (55 mph)
while towing the vehicle.

10-67

Dolly Towing

Tow the vehicle with the two rear
wheels on the ground and the front
wheels on a dolly:
Notice: Towing the vehicle from
the rear could damage it. Also,
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have
the vehicle towed from the rear.

To tow the vehicle with two wheels
on the ground and a dolly:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Shift the automatic transmission
into P (Park) or a manual
transmission into 1 (First) gear.
3. Set the parking brake.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-68

Black plate (68,1)

Vehicle Care

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a
straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed for
towing.

Appearance Care

5. Remove the key from the
ignition.

Washing the Vehicle

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.

Notice: Towing the vehicle from
the rear could damage it. Also,
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have
the vehicle towed from the rear.

Exterior Care
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
wash it often and out of direct
sunlight.
Notice: Do not use
petroleum-based, acidic,
or abrasive cleaning agents as
they can damage the vehicle's
paint, metal, or plastic parts.
If damage occurs, it would not be
covered by the vehicle's warranty.
Approved cleaning products can
be obtained from your dealer.
Follow all manufacturer
directions regarding correct
product usage, necessary safety
precautions, and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product.
Notice: Avoid using
high-pressure washes closer than
30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the
vehicle. Use of power washers

exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)
can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.

Finish Care
Application of aftermarket clearcoat
sealant/wax materials is not
recommended. If painted surfaces
are damaged, see your dealer to
have the damage assessed and
repaired. Foreign materials such as
calcium chloride and other salts, ice
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (69,1)

Vehicle Care
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Occasional hand waxing or mild
polishing should be done to remove
residue from the paint finish. See
your dealer for approved cleaning
products.
Do not apply waxes or polishes to
uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint
as damage can occur.
Notice: Machine compounding or
aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the
vehicle.
To keep the paint finish looking new,
keep the vehicle garaged or
covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
Regularly clean bright metal parts
with water or chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim,
if necessary.
For aluminum, never use auto or
chrome polish, steam, or caustic
soap to clean. A coating of wax,
rubbed to a high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal
parts.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Lenses and Emblems
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps, lenses and
emblems. Follow instructions under
"Washing the Vehicle" in this
section.

Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.

10-69

Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
cloth or paper towel soaked with
windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper
streaking.
Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged. Damage can be
caused by extreme dusty
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips
Apply silicone grease on
weatherstrips to make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips
once a year. Black marks from
rubber material on painted surfaces
can be removed by rubbing with a
clean cloth. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on
page 11‑12.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-70

Black plate (70,1)

Vehicle Care

Tires
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
clean the tires.
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild
soap and water to clean the wheels.
After rinsing thoroughly with clean
water, dry with a soft, clean towel.
A wax may then be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other
chrome trim may be damaged if
the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been
sprayed with magnesium,
calcium, or sodium chloride.
These chlorides are used on
roads for conditions such as ice

and dust. Always wash the
chrome with soap and water after
exposure.

check constant velocity joints,
rubber boots, and axle seals for
leaks.

Notice: To avoid surface damage,
do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. Use only
approved cleaners. Also, never
drive a vehicle with aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels through an
automatic car wash that uses
silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. Damage could occur
and the repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.

Body Component Lubrication

Steering, Suspension, and
Chassis Components
Visually inspect the front and rear
suspension and steering system for
damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect the power
steering for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,
hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the
steel fuel door hinge unless the
components are plastic. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.

Underbody Maintenance
Use plain water to flush dirt and
debris from the vehicle's underbody.
Your dealer or an underbody car
washing system can do this. If not
removed, rust and corrosion can
develop.

Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (71,1)

Vehicle Care
material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining the
vehicle warranty.

Finish Damage
Quickly repair minor chips and
scratches with touch-up materials
available from your dealer to avoid
corrosion. Larger areas of finish
damage can be corrected in your
dealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting
Airborne pollutants can fall upon
and attack painted vehicle surfaces
causing blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.

Interior Care
To prevent dirt particle abrasions,
regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
Immediately remove any soils. Note
that newspapers or dark garments
that can transfer color to home
furnishings can also permanently
transfer color to the vehicle's
interior.
Use a soft bristle brush to remove
dust from knobs and crevices on the
instrument cluster. Using a mild
soap solution, immediately remove
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
repellent from all interior surfaces or
permanent damage may result.
Your dealer may have products for
cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
specifically designed for the
surfaces being cleaned to prevent
permanent damage. Apply all
cleaners directly to the cleaning
cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
on any switches or controls.
Cleaners should be removed
quickly. Never allow cleaners to

10-71

remain on the surface being
cleaned for extended periods
of time.
Cleaners may contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the
interior. Before using cleaners, read
and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the
interior, maintain adequate
ventilation by opening the doors and
windows.
To prevent damage, do not clean
the interior using the following
cleaners or techniques:
.

Never use a razor or any other
sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.

.

Never use a brush with stiff
bristles.

.

Never rub any surface
aggressively or with excessive
pressure.

.

Do not use laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. For liquid cleaners,
use approximately 20 drops per

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-72

Black plate (72,1)

Vehicle Care

3.78 L (1 gal) of water.
A concentrated soap solution will
leave a residue that creates
streaks and attracts dirt. Do not
use solutions that contain strong
or caustic soap.

Notice: Cleaning the windshield
with water during the first three to
six months of ownership will
reduce tendency to fog.

.

Do not heavily saturate the
upholstery when cleaning.

.

Do not use solvents or cleaners
containing solvents.

Vacuum around a speaker cover
gently, so that the speaker will not
be damaged. Clean spots with just
water and mild soap.

Interior Glass
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric
dampened with water. Wipe droplets
left behind with a clean dry cloth.
Commercial glass cleaners may be
used, if necessary, after cleaning
the interior glass with plain water.
Notice: To prevent scratching,
never use abrasive cleaners on
automotive glass. Abrasive
cleaners or aggressive cleaning
may damage the rear window
defogger.

Speaker Covers

Fabric/Carpet/Suede
Start by vacuuming the surface
using a soft brush attachment. If a
rotating brush attachment is being
used during vacuuming, only use it
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the
following techniques:
.

Gently blot liquids with a paper
towel. Continue blotting until no
more soil can be removed.

.

For solid soils, remove as much
as possible prior to vacuuming.

Coated Moldings
Coated moldings should be cleaned.
.

When lightly soiled, wipe with a
sponge or soft lint-free cloth
dampened with water.

.

When heavily soiled, use warm
soapy water.

To clean:
1. Saturate a clean lint-free
colorfast cloth with water or club
soda. Microfiber cloth is
recommended to prevent lint
transfer to the fabric or carpet.
2. Remove excess moisture by
gently wringing until water does
not drip from the cleaning cloth.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (73,1)

Vehicle Care
3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Fold the cleaning cloth to
a clean area frequently to
prevent forcing the soil in to the
fabric.
4. Continue gently rubbing the
soiled area until there is no
longer any color transfer from
the soil to the cleaning cloth.
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution followed only by club
soda or plain water.
If the soil is not completely
removed, it may be necessary to
use a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small
hidden area for colorfastness before
using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring
formation occurs, clean the entire
fabric or carpet.
Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces
and Vehicle Information and
Radio Displays
For vehicles with high gloss
surfaces or vehicle displays, use a
microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces.
Before wiping the surface with the
microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle
brush to remove dirt that could
scratch the surface. Then use the
microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to
clean. Never use window cleaners
or solvents. Periodically hand wash
the microfiber cloth separately,
using mild soap. Do not use bleach
or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
and air dry before next use.
Notice: Do not attach a device
with a suction cup to the display.
This may cause damage and
would not be covered by the
warranty.

10-73

Instrument Panel, Leather,
Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces
Use a soft microfiber cloth
dampened with water to remove
dust and loose dirt. For a more
thorough cleaning, use a soft
microfiber cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution.
Notice: Soaking or saturating
leather, especially perforated
leather, as well as other interior
surfaces, may cause permanent
damage. Wipe excess moisture
from these surfaces after
cleaning and allow them to dry
naturally. Never use heat, steam,
spot lifters, or spot removers. Do
not use cleaners that contain
silicone or wax-based products.
Cleaners containing these
solvents can permanently change
the appearance and feel of leather
or soft trim and are not
recommended.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-74

Black plate (74,1)

Vehicle Care

Do not use cleaners that increase
gloss, especially on the instrument
panel. Reflected glare can decrease
visibility through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Notice: Use of air fresheners may
cause permanent damage to
plastics and painted surfaces.
If an air freshener comes in
contact with any plastic or
painted surface in the vehicle,
blot immediately and clean with a
soft cloth dampened with a mild
soap solution. Damage caused by
air fresheners would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover and
Convenience Net
Wash with warm water and mild
detergent. Do not use chlorine
bleach. Rinse with cold water, and
then dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.

Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage:
.

The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the pedals. Always
check that the floor mats do not
interfere with the pedals.

.

Use the floor mat with the
correct side up. Do not turn
it over.

.

Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.

.

Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.

.

Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING
If a floor mat is the wrong size or
is not properly installed, it can
interfere with the pedals.
Interference with the pedals can
cause unintended acceleration
and/or increased stopping
distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
mat does not interfere with the
pedals.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (75,1)

Vehicle Care
Removing and Replacing the
Floor Mats
Pull up on the rear of the floor mat
to unlock each retainer and remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor mat
retainer openings over the carpet
retainers and snap into position.
Make sure the floor mat is properly
secured in place.
Verify the floor mat does not
interfere with the pedals.

10-75

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

10-76

Black plate (76,1)

Vehicle Care

2 NOTES

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (1,1)

Service and Maintenance

Service and
Maintenance
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2

Special Application Services
Special Application
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenance
and Care
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Replacement
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15

General Information
Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
the required maintenance for the
vehicle. Follow this schedule to help
protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance. It may
also help to maintain the value of
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
responsibility of the owner to have
all required maintenance performed.
Your dealer has trained technicians
who can perform required
maintenance using genuine
replacement parts. They have up‐to‐
date tools and equipment for fast
and accurate diagnostics. Many
dealers have extended evening and
Saturday hours, courtesy
transportation, and online
scheduling to assist with service
needs.
Your dealer recognizes the
importance of providing
competitively priced maintenance
and repair services. With trained

11-1

technicians, the dealer is the place
for routine maintenance such as oil
changes and tire rotations and
additional maintenance items like
tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
blades.
Notice: Damage caused by
improper maintenance can lead to
costly repairs and may not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, recommended fluids,
and lubricants are important to
keep the vehicle in good working
condition.
The Tire Rotation and Required
Services are the responsibility of the
vehicle owner. It is recommended to
have your dealer perform these
services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
keep the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

11-2

Service and Maintenance

Because of the way people use
vehicles, maintenance needs vary.
There may need to be more
frequent checks and services. The
Additional Required Services ‐
Normal are for vehicles that:
.

Black plate (2,1)

Carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑9.

.

Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.

.

Use the recommended fuel. See
Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑33.

Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services ‐ Normal chart.
The Additional Required Services ‐
Severe are for vehicles that are:
.

Mainly driven in heavy city traffic
in hot weather.

.

Mainly driven in hilly or
mountainous terrain.

.

Frequently towing a trailer.

.

Used for high speed or
competitive driving.

.

Used for taxi, police, or delivery
service.

Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services ‐ Severe chart.

{ WARNING
Performing maintenance work can
be dangerous and can cause
serious injury. Perform
maintenance work only if the
required information, proper tools,
and equipment are available.
If they are not, see your dealer to
have a trained technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own
Service Work on page 10‑3.

Maintenance
Schedule
Owner Checks and Services
At Each Fuel Stop
.

Check the engine oil level. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑7.

Once a Month
.

Check the tire inflation
pressures. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑41.

.

Inspect the tires for wear. See
Tire Inspection on page 10‑46.

.

Check the windshield washer
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑17.

Engine Oil Change
When the Code 82 DIC message
displays, have the engine oil and
filter changed within the next
1 000 km/600 mi. If driven under the
best conditions, the engine oil life
system might not indicate the need
for vehicle service for more than a

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (3,1)

Service and Maintenance
year. The engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year
and the oil life system must be
reset. Your trained dealer technician
can perform this work. If the engine
oil life system is reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 5 000 km/
3,000 mi since the last service.
Reset the oil life system when the
oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
System on page 10‑9.

Tire Rotation and Required
Services Every 12 000 km/
7,500 mi
Rotate the tires, if recommended for
the vehicle, and perform the
following services. See Tire
Rotation on page 10‑46.
.

.

Check engine oil level and oil
life percentage. If needed,
change engine oil and filter, and
reset oil life system. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑7 and Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑9.
Check engine coolant level. See
Engine Coolant on page 10‑13.

11-3

.

Check windshield washer fluid
level. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑17.

.

Check restraint system
components. See Safety System
Check on page 3‑16.

.

Visually inspect windshield wiper
blades for wear, cracking,
or contamination. See Exterior
Care on page 10‑68. Replace
worn or damaged wiper blades.
See Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 10‑22.

.

Visually inspect fuel system for
damage or leaks.

.

Visually inspect exhaust system
and nearby heat shields for
loose or damaged parts.

.

Lubricate body components. See
Exterior Care on page 10‑68.

.

Check starter switch. See Starter
Switch Check on page 10‑21.

.

Check automatic transmission
shift lock control function. See
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function Check on
page 10‑21.

.

Check ignition transmission lock.
See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 10‑22.

.

Check parking brake and
automatic transmission park
mechanism. See Park Brake and
P (Park) Mechanism Check on
page 10‑22.

.

Check tire inflation pressures.
See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑41.

.

Inspect tire wear. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑46.

.

Visually check for fluid leaks.

.

Inspect engine air cleaner filter.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑11.

.

Inspect brake system.

.

Visually inspect steering,
suspension, and chassis
components for damaged, loose,
or missing parts or signs of
wear. See Exterior Care on
page 10‑68.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

11-4

Service and Maintenance

.

Check accelerator pedal for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.

.

Check accessory drive belt
tension, or once a year,
whichever comes first.

.

Visually inspect gas strut for
signs of wear, cracks, or other
damage. Check the hold open
ability of the strut. See your
dealer if service is required.

.

Check tire sealant expiration
date. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10‑54.

Black plate (4,1)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (5,1)

Service and Maintenance

11-5

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

11-6

Black plate (6,1)

Service and Maintenance

Footnotes — Maintenance
Schedule Additional Required
Services — Normal

(6) Inspect for fraying, excessive
cracking, or damage; replace,
if needed.

(1) Or every two years, whichever
comes first. More frequent
replacement may be needed if the
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy
traffic, areas with poor air quality,
or areas with high dust levels.
Replacement may also be needed if
there is a reduction in air flow,
excessive window fogging, or odors.

(7) Or every two years, whichever
comes first.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve, if the vehicle has
one, works properly. Replace as
needed.
(3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
(4) Or every five years, whichever
comes first. See Cooling System on
page 10‑12.
(5) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (7,1)

Service and Maintenance

11-7

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

11-8

Black plate (8,1)

Service and Maintenance

Footnotes — Maintenance
Schedule Additional Required
Services — Severe

(4) Or every five years, whichever
comes first. See Cooling System on
page 10‑12.

Special Application
Services

(1) Or every two years, whichever
comes first. More frequent
replacement may be needed if the
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy
traffic, areas with poor air quality,
or areas with high dust levels.
Replacement may also be needed if
there is a reduction in air flow,
excessive window fogging, or odors.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first.

.

Severe Commercial Use
Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
components every 5 000 km/
3,000 mi.

.

Have underbody flushing service
performed once a year.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve, if the vehicle has
one, works properly. Replace as
needed.
(3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.

(6) Inspect for fraying, excessive
cracking, or damage; replace,
if needed.
(7) Or every two years, whichever
comes first.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (9,1)

Service and Maintenance

Additional
Maintenance and Care

.

To avoid break‐down or failure to
start the vehicle, maintain a
battery with full cranking power.

Your vehicle is an important
investment and caring for it properly
may help to avoid future costly
repairs. To maintain vehicle
performance, additional
maintenance services may be
required. It is recommended that
your dealer perform these services
— their trained dealer technicians
know your vehicle best. Your dealer
can also perform a thorough
assessment with a multi‐point
inspection to recommend when your
vehicle may need attention. The
following list is intended to explain
the services and conditions to look
for that may indicate services are
required.

.

Trained dealer technicians have
the diagnostic equipment to test
the battery and ensure that the
connections and cables are
corrosion‐free.

Battery
The battery supplies power to start
the engine and operate any
additional electrical accessories.

Belts
.

Belts may need replacing if they
squeak or show signs of
cracking or splitting.

.

Trained dealer technicians can
inspect the belts and
recommend replacement when
necessary.

Brakes
Brakes stop the vehicle and are
crucial to safe driving.
.

Signs of brake wear may include
chirping, grinding, or squealing
noises, or difficulty stopping.

.

11-9

Trained dealer technicians have
access to tools and equipment
to inspect the brakes and
recommend quality parts
engineered for the vehicle.

Fluids
Proper fluid levels and approved
fluids protect the vehicle’s systems
and components. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑12 for GM
approved fluids.
.

Engine oil and windshield
washer fluid levels should be
checked at every fuel fill.

.

Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.

Hoses
Hoses transport fluids and should
be regularly inspected to ensure
that there are no cracks or leaks.
With a multi‐point inspection, your
dealer can inspect the hoses and
advise if replacement is needed.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

11-10

Black plate (10,1)

Service and Maintenance

Lamps
Properly working headlamps,
taillamps, and brake lamps are
important to see and be seen on
the road.
.

.

Signs that the headlamps need
attention include dimming, failure
to light, cracking, or damage.
The brake lamps need to be
checked periodically to ensure
that they light when braking.

the shocks and struts for signs
of leaking, blown seals,
or damage, and can advise
when service is needed.
Tires
Tires need to be properly inflated,
rotated, and balanced. Maintaining
the tires can save money, fuel, and
can reduce the risk of tire failure.
.

With a multi‐point inspection,
your dealer can check the lamps
and note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts
Shocks and struts help aid in control
for a smoother ride.
.

Signs of wear may include
steering wheel vibration, bounce/
sway while braking, longer
stopping distance, or uneven
tire wear.

.

As part of the multi‐point
inspection, trained dealer
technicians can visually inspect

.

Signs that the tires need to be
replaced include three or more
visible treadwear indicators; cord
or fabric showing through the
rubber; cracks or cuts in the
tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
split in the tire.
Trained dealer technicians can
inspect and recommend the right
tires. Your dealer can also
provide tire/wheel balancing
services to ensure smooth
vehicle operation at all speeds.
Your dealer sells and services
name brand tires.

Vehicle Care
To help keep the vehicle looking like
new, vehicle care products are
available from your dealer. For
information on how to clean and
protect the vehicle’s interior and
exterior, see Interior Care on
page 10‑71 and Exterior Care on
page 10‑68.
Wheel Alignment
Wheel alignment is critical for
ensuring that the tires deliver
optimal wear and performance.
.

Signs that the alignment may
need to be adjusted include
pulling, improper vehicle
handling, or unusual tire wear.

.

Your dealer has the required
equipment to ensure proper
wheel alignment.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (11,1)

Service and Maintenance
Windshield
For safety, appearance, and the
best viewing, keep the windshield
clean and clear.
.

Signs of damage include
scratches, cracks, and chips.

.

Trained dealer technicians can
inspect the windshield and
recommend proper replacement
if needed.

Wiper Blades
Wiper blades need to be cleaned
and kept in good condition to
provide a clear view.
.

Signs of wear include streaking,
skipping across the windshield,
and worn or split rubber.

.

Trained dealer technicians can
check the wiper blades and
replace them when needed.

11-11

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

11-12

Black plate (12,1)

Service and Maintenance

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage
Engine Oil

Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Brake/Clutch System
Windshield Washer
Automatic Transmission

Fluid/Lubricant
Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of
the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑13.
DOT 4 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88958860, in
Canada 88901244).
Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Manual Transmission

75W-85 Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 88862472, in
Canada 88862473).

Key Lock Cylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (13,1)

Service and Maintenance

11-13

Usage

Fluid/Lubricant

Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674)
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door Hinges
Weatherstrip Conditioning

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Maintenance Replacement Parts
GM Part Number

ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

Part

96910360

—

Engine Oil Filter

96985730

—

Passenger Compartment Air Filter

13271190

—

Spark Plugs

25181358

—

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

11-14

Black plate (14,1)

Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Replacement Parts (cont'd)
Part

GM Part Number

ACDelco Part Number

Driver Side – 60 cm (23.6 in)

95108156

—

Passenger Side – 40 cm (15.7 in)

95108153

—

Rear

96688389

—

Wiper Blades

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (15,1)

Service and Maintenance

11-15

Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Date

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Services Performed

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

11-16

Date

Black plate (16,1)

Service and Maintenance
Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Services Performed

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (17,1)

Service and Maintenance

Date

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Services Performed

11-17

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

11-18

Date

Black plate (18,1)

Service and Maintenance
Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Services Performed

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (1,1)

Technical Data

Technical Data

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)

Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

12-1

Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is
the engine code. This code
identifies the vehicle's engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.

Service Parts
Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:

This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.

.

Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).

.

Model designation.

.

Paint information.

.

Production options and special
equipment.

Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

12-2

Black plate (2,1)

Technical Data

Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑12 for more information.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Capacities
Metric

English

For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

4.8 L

5.0 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

3.8 L

4.0 qt

Fuel Tank

35 L

9 gal

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (3,1)

Technical Data
Capacities

Application

Metric

Transmission, Automatic
Wheel Nut Torque

English

4.5 L

4.8 qt

125 Y

92 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications
Engine
1.2L L4

VIN Code

Transmission

Spark Plug Gap

9

Automatic and Manual

0.8 mm (0.031 in)

12-3

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

12-4

Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

Black plate (4,1)

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (1,1)

Customer Information

Customer
Information
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Assistance
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-11

Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

13-1

Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and to
Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer's sales or
service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has not
been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has already been
reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of your dealership or the general
manager.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

13-2

Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting a
member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by your dealership without
further help, in the U.S., call the
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In
Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Care Centre at
1-800-263-3777 (English),
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the
toll-free number in order to give your
inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to
give the Customer Assistance
representative:
.

Black plate (2,1)

Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or
title, or the plate at the top left of
the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.

.

Dealership name and location.

.

Vehicle delivery date and
present mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,
remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's
facility. That is why we suggest
following Step One first.

40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any
other venue for relief available
to you.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:
Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied
with the new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied
after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you
can file with the Better Business
Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program
to enforce your rights.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them at
the following address:

The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out-of-court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may
be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the
program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within

BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus,
Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage, and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (3,1)

Customer Information
STEP THREE — Canadian
Owners: In the event that you do
not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its
participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for
the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.

13-3

For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
the General Motors Customer Care
Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),
1-800-263-7854 (French),
or write to:

Customer Assistance
Offices

The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Care Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

United States and Puerto Rico

The inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).

Chevrolet encourages customers to
call the toll-free number for
assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
the letter should be addressed to:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text
Telephone Devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-243-8872
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

13-4

Black plate (4,1)

Customer Information

Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gm.ca
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800

Overseas
Please contact the local General
Motors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer

Assistance Center. Any TTY user in
the U.S. can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

I (Service History):

Online Owner Center

Information): Select a preferred
dealer and view dealer location,
maps, phone numbers, and hours.

Online Owner Experience
(U.S.) my.chevrolet.com
The Chevrolet online owner
experience is a one-stop resource
that allows interaction with
Chevrolet and keeps important
vehicle-specific information in one
place.
Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):
Download owner manuals and view
vehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):
View maintenance schedules,
required alerts, OnStar onboard
vehicle diagnostic information, and
schedule service appointments.

View
printable dealer-recorded service
records and self-recorded service
records.

D (Preferred Dealer

J (Warranty Tracking
Information): Track the vehicle’s
warranty information.

J (Recall Information):

View
active recalls or search by Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). See
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
on page 12‑1.

H (Other Account Information):
View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
radio, and OnStar account
information.

F (Live Chat Support):

Chat live
with online help representatives.
Visit my.chevrolet.com to register
your vehicle.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (5,1)

Customer Information
Chevrolet Owner Centre
(Canada) chevroletowner.ca

GM Mobility
Reimbursement Program

Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner
Centre:
.

Chat live with online help
representatives.

.

Use the Vehicle Tools section.

.

Access third party enthusiast
sites and social media networks.

.

.

Locate owner resources such as
lease-end, financing, and
warranty information.
Retrieve your favorite articles,
quizzes, tips, and multimedia
galleries organized into the
Features and Auto Care
Sections.

.

Download the owner manual for
your vehicle, quickly and easily.

.

Find the
Chevrolet-recommended
maintenance services for your
vehicle.

13-5

General Motors of Canada also has
a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance
Program
This program is available to
qualified applicants for cost
reimbursement of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment
required for the vehicle, such as
hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift for the vehicle.
For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
Telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935.

For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone
(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
For Canadian-purchased vehicles,
call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information
ready:
.

Your name, home address, and
home telephone number.

.

Telephone number of your
location.

.

Location of the vehicle.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

13-6

Customer Information

.

Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle.

.

Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.

.

Black plate (6,1)

Description of the problem.

claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.

Services Provided
.

Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.

.

Lock-Out Service: Service to
unlock the vehicle if you are
locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar.
For security reasons, the driver
must present identification
before this service is given.

Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/
160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.

.

Roadside Assistance is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the

must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is the owner's
responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.

.

Emergency Tow from a Public
Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.
Flat Tire Change: Service to
change a flat tire with the spare
tire. The spare tire, if equipped,

.

Battery Jump Start: Service to
jump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included in
Roadside Assistance
.

Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.

.

Legal fines.

.

Mounting, dismounting,
or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.

.

Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.

Services Specific to
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles
.

Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (7,1)

Customer Information
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
.

Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
registration is required.

.

Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over
250 kilometers from where your
trip was started to qualify.
General Motors of Canada
Limited requires
pre-authorization, original
detailed receipts, and a copy of
the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received,
the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help to make arrangements
and explain how to receive
payment.

.

Alternative Service: If
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
Assistance advisor may give
permission to get local
emergency road service. You will
receive payment, up to $100,
after sending the original receipt

to Roadside Assistance.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.

Scheduling Service
Appointments
When the vehicle requires warranty
service, contact your dealer and
request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment
and advising the service consultant
of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your
inconvenience.
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it
can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety related. If it is, please call
your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.

13-7

If your dealer requests you to bring
the vehicle for service, you are
urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for
same-day repair.

Courtesy Transportation
Program
To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada),
extended powertrain, and/or
hybrid-specific warranties in both
the U.S. and Canada.
Several Courtesy Transportation
options are available to assist in
reducing inconvenience when
warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Limited Warranty and
Owner Assistance Information”

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

13-8

Black plate (8,1)

Customer Information

furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage
information.

Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize inconvenience by
providing several transportation
options. Depending on the
circumstances, your dealer can offer
one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
Transportation. Dealers may provide
shuttle service to get you to your
destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round-trip shuttle service
within reasonable time and distance
parameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If the vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of
your dealer's shuttle service, the
expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up
to the maximum amount allowed by
GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you
arrange transportation through a
friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable fuel
expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs
and be supported by original
receipts. See your dealer for
information regarding the allowance
amounts for reimbursement of fuel
or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept
for an overnight warranty repair.

Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original
receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
It may not be possible to provide a
like vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional Program
Information
All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact your
dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be
administered by appropriate dealer
personnel.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (9,1)

Customer Information
General Motors reserves the right to
unilaterally modify, change,
or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to
resolve all questions of claim
eligibility pursuant to the terms and
conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.

ensure that the vehicle's designed
appearance, durability, and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain the GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Collision Parts

Recycled original equipment parts
may also be used for repair. These
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part may be an acceptable choice to
maintain the vehicle's originally
designed appearance and safety
performance; however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by the GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.

Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the
parts with which the vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are the best choice to

Aftermarket collision parts are also
available. These are made by
companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for the vehicle.
As a result, these parts may fit
poorly, exhibit premature durability/

Collision Damage Repair
If the vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have the
damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish the vehicle resale
value, and safety performance can
be compromised in subsequent
collisions.

13-9

corrosion problems, and may not
perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
covered by the GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts is not
covered by that warranty.

Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you
choose a collision repair facility that
meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. Your dealer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained
technicians and comparable
equipment.

Insuring the Vehicle
Protect your investment in the GM
vehicle with comprehensive and
collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the
quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

13-10

Black plate (10,1)

Customer Information

Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to the GM
vehicle by limiting compensation for
damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you ensure that the
vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not
available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that ensures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read the lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
the lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are
instructed to move it by a police
officer.
Give only the necessary information
to police and other parties involved
in the crash.
For emergency towing see
Roadside Assistance Program on
page 13‑5.
Gather the following information:
.

Driver name, address, and
telephone number.

.

Driver license number.

.

Owner name, address, and
telephone number.

.

Vehicle license plate number.

.

Vehicle make, model, and
model year.

.

Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).

.

Insurance company and policy
number.

.

General description of the
damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facility
that uses quality replacement parts.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
section.
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Will You See after an Airbag
Inflates? on page 3‑23.

Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that the vehicle requires
damage repairs, GM recommends
that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take the
vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (11,1)

Customer Information

13-11

original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered by
the GM vehicle warranty.

Service Publications
Ordering Information

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Booklet.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may
initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
the repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts. Remember,
if the vehicle is leased, you may be
obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.

Service Manuals

RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees.

If another party's insurance
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as
long as the cost stays within
reasonable limits.

Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on the
engines, transmission, axle,
suspension, brakes, electrical,
steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and
service of the vehicle.

Owner Information
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The
Owner Manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all
models.

Without Portfolio: Owner
Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees.

Current and Past Models
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles.
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

13-12

Black plate (12,1)

Customer Information

Or write to:
Helm, Incorporated
Attention: Customer Service
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, MI 48170
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
funds.

Reporting Safety
Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (13,1)

Customer Information

Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, and notify General
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
Transport Canada at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
80 rue Noel
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
Transport Canada) in a situation like
this, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

13-13

Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
The vehicle has a number of
computers that record information
about the vehicle’s performance and
how it is driven. For example, the
vehicle uses computer modules to
monitor and control engine and
transmission performance, to
monitor the conditions for airbag
deployment and deploy them in a
crash, and, if equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver
control the vehicle. These modules
may store data to help the dealer
technician service the vehicle.
Some modules may also store data
about how the vehicle is operated,
such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules may
retain personal preferences, such as
radio presets, seat positions, and
temperature settings.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

13-14

Black plate (14,1)

Customer Information

Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
.

How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;

.

Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;

.

How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/
or brake pedal; and,

.

How fast the vehicle was
traveling.

These data can help provide a
better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,

if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request by police or
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®
If the vehicle is equipped with
OnStar® and has an active
subscription, refer to the OnStar®
Terms and Conditions for
information on data collection and
use. See OnStar Overview on
page 14‑1.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (15,1)

Customer Information

Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire
pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences such
as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitters for remote door locking/
unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with any
other GM system containing
personal information.

Radio Frequency
Statement
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. The device may not cause
harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.

13-15

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

13-16

Black plate (16,1)

Customer Information

2 NOTES

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (1,1)

OnStar

OnStar

OnStar Overview

OnStar Overview
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar Services
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14-2
14-2
14-2
14-3
14-5

OnStar Additional Information
OnStar Additional
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

If equipped, this vehicle has a
comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live Advisor
for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
Connection, and Diagnostic
Services.
The OnStar system status light is
next to the OnStar buttons. If the
status light is:
.

Solid Green: System is ready.

.

Flashing Green: On a call.

.

Red: Indicates a problem.

Push | or call 1-888-4ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
Advisor.

Push

=

14-1

to:

.

Make a call, end a call,
or answer an incoming call.

.

Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.

.

Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Navigation voice commands.
Requires the available Directions
and Connections service plan.

Push | to connect to a live
Advisor to:
.

Verify account information or
update contact information.

.

Get driving directions. Requires
the available Directions and
Connections service plan.

.

Receive On-Demand
Diagnostics for a check of the
vehicle’s key operating systems.

.

Receive Roadside Assistance.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

14-2

Black plate (2,1)

OnStar

Push the OnStar Emergency button
> to get a priority connection to an
Emergency Advisor available
24/7 to:

OnStar Services

.

Get help for an emergency.

.

Be a Good Samaritan or
respond to an AMBER Alert.

With Automatic Crash Response,
the built-in system can automatically
connect to help in most crashes,
even if help cannot be requested.

.

Get crisis assistance and
evacuation routes.

Emergency

Push > to connect to an
Emergency Advisor. GPS
technology is used to identify the
vehicle location and can provide
critical information to emergency
personnel. The Advisor is also
trained to offer critical assistance in
emergency situations before first
responders arrive.

equipped with automatic door locks,
and can help police locate the
vehicle if it is stolen.

Navigation
OnStar navigation requires the
Directions and Connections
service plan.
Push | to receive directions or
have them sent to the vehicle
navigation screen, if equipped.
Destinations can also be forwarded
to the vehicle from Google Maps™
or MapQuest.com. The OnStar
mapping database is continuously
updated. Visit www.onstar.com for
coverage maps.

Security

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

OnStar provides services like Stolen
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition
Block, and Roadside Assistance,
if the vehicle is equipped with these
services. OnStar can unlock the
vehicle doors remotely, if it is

1. Push | to connect to a live
Advisor.
2. Request directions.
3. Directions are downloaded to the
vehicle.
4. Follow the voice-guided
commands.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (3,1)

OnStar
Using Voice Commands
During a Planned Route
Cancel Route
1. Push = . System responds:
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say
“Cancel route.” System
responds: “Do you want to
cancel directions?”
2. Say “Yes.” System responds:
“OK, request completed, thank
you, goodbye.”
Route Preview
1. Push = . System responds:
“OnStar ready,” then a tone.
2. Say “Route preview.” System
responds with the next three
maneuvers.
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice
commands.
Repeat
1. Push = . System responds:
“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Repeat.” System responds
with the last direction given, then
responds with “OnStar ready,”
then a tone.
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice
commands.
Get My Destination
1. Push = . System responds:
“OnStar ready,” then a tone.
2. Say “Get my destination.”
System responds with address
and the distance to the
destination, then responds with
“OnStar ready,” then a tone.
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice
commands.

Other Navigation Services
Available from OnStar
OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
to send destinations from Google
Maps and MapQuest.com to their
Turn-by-Turn Navigation or
screen-based navigation system.
When ready, the directions will be
downloaded to the vehicle.

14-3

Destination Download: Push |,
then request the Advisor to
download directions to the
navigation system in the vehicle.
After the call ends, push the “Go”
button on the navigation screen to
begin driving directions.
Destinations can also be
downloaded on the go. For
information about eNav, Destination
Download, and coverage maps visit
www.onstar.com.

Connections
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
calls to be made and received from
the vehicle. The vehicle can also be
controlled from a cell phone through
the OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.
See www.onstar.com for
coverage maps.

Hands-Free Calling
1. Push = . System responds:
“OnStar ready.”

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

14-4

Black plate (4,1)

OnStar

2. Say “Call.” System responds:
“Please say the name or number
to call.”
3. Say the entire number without
pausing, including a “1” and the
area code. System responds:
“OK calling.”

End a Call
Push = . System responds: “Call
ended.”

Store a Name Tag for Speed
Dialing

Calling 911 Emergency

1. Push = . System responds:
“OnStar ready.”

1. Press = . The system responds
“OnStar Ready,” followed by
a tone.

2. Say “Store.” System responds:
“Please say the number you
would like to store.”

2. Say “Call.” The system responds
“Please say the name or number
to call.”

3. Say the entire number without
pausing. System responds:
“Please say the name tag.”

3. Say “911” without pausing. The
system responds “911.”

4. Pick a name tag. System
responds: “About to store . Does that sound OK?”

4. Say “Call.” The system responds
“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number
1. Push = . System responds:
“OnStar ready.”
2. Say “My number.” System
responds: “Your OnStar
Hands-Free Calling number is.”

5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.
System responds: “OK, storing
.”

Place a Call Using a Stored
Number
1. Push = . System responds:
“OnStar ready.”
2. Say “Call .” System
responds: “OK, calling
.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration
Push = and say “Minutes” then
“Verify” to check how many minutes
remain and their expiration date.

OnStar Mobile App
Download the OnStar RemoteLink
mobile app to your iPhone or
Android smartphone to check
vehicle fuel level, oil life, or tire
pressure; to start the vehicle (if
equipped) or unlock it; or to connect
to an OnStar Advisor. For OnStar
RemoteLink information and
compatibility, see www.onstar.com.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (5,1)

OnStar

Diagnostics
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will
perform a vehicle check every
month. It will check the engine,
transmission, antilock brakes, and
major vehicle systems. It also
checks the tire pressures, if the
vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System. If a
diagnostics check is needed
between e-mails, push |, and an
Advisor can run a check.

OnStar Additional
Information
Transferring Service
Push | to request account transfer
eligibility information. The Advisor
can assist in canceling or removing
account information. If OnStar
receives information that vehicle
ownership has changed, OnStar
may send a voice message to the
vehicle, requesting updated account
information.

Reactivation for Subsequent
Owners
Push | and follow the prompts to
speak to an Advisor as soon as
possible after acquiring the vehicle.
The Advisor will update vehicle
records and will explain the OnStar
service offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works
Automatic Crash Response,
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle

14-5

Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
are available on most vehicles. Not
all OnStar services are available
everywhere or on all vehicles. For
more information, a full description
of OnStar services, system
limitations, and OnStar terms and
conditions, see www.onstar.com
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);
contact OnStar at 1-888-4ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY
1-877-248-2080; or push | to
speak with an Advisor. OnStar
services require a vehicle electrical
system, wireless service, and GPS
satellite technologies to be available
and operating for features to
function properly. These systems
may not operate if the battery is
discharged or disconnected.
OnStar service cannot work unless
your vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area, and the wireless
service provider has coverage,

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

14-6

Black plate (6,1)

OnStar

network capacity, reception, and
technology compatible with OnStar
service. Service involving location
information about the vehicle cannot
work unless GPS signals are
available, unobstructed, and
compatible with the OnStar
hardware. OnStar service may not
work if the OnStar equipment is not
properly installed or it has not been
properly maintained. If equipment or
software is added, connected,
or modified, OnStar service may not
work. Other problems beyond the
control of OnStar may prevent
service such as hills, tall buildings,
tunnels, weather, electrical system
design and architecture of the
vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a
crash, or wireless phone network
congestion or jamming.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑15 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People with
Disabilities

OnStar.com

.

Locating a gas station with an
attendant to pump gas.

The website provides access to
account information, manages the
OnStar subscription, and allows
viewing of videos of each service.
Get subscription plan pricing and
sign up for OnStar Vehicle
Diagnostics. Click on the “My
Account” tab on the home page.

.

Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,
that meets accessibility needs.

OnStar Personal Identification
Number (PIN)

.

Providing directions to the
closest hospital or pharmacy in
urgent situations.

A PIN is needed to access some of
the OnStar services, like Remote
Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
Assistance. You will be prompted to
change the PIN the first time when
speaking with an Advisor. To
change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar
and provide the Advisor with the
current number.

Advisors provide services to help
subscribers with physical disabilities
and medical conditions.
Push

| for help with:

TTY Users
OnStar has the ability to
communicate to the deaf,
hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired
customers while in the vehicle. The
available dealer-installed TTY
system can provide in-vehicle
access to all of the OnStar services,
except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation.

Warranty
OnStar equipment may be
warranted as part of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. The

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (7,1)

OnStar
manufacturer of the vehicle
furnishes detailed warranty
information.

garages; or in an area with very
dense trees. If GPS signals are
not available, the OnStar system
should still operate to call
OnStar. However, OnStar could
have difficulty identifying the
exact location.

Languages
The vehicle can be programmed to
respond in French or Spanish. Push
| and ask an Advisor. Advisors can
speak French or Spanish.

.

Potential Issues
Some OnStar services are disabled
after five days. OnStar cannot
perform Remote Door Unlock or
Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the
vehicle has been off continuously
for five days. After five days, OnStar
can contact Roadside Assistance
and a locksmith to help gain access
to the vehicle.

Global Positioning
System (GPS)
.

Obstruction of the GPS can
occur in a large city with tall
buildings; in parking garages;
around airports; in tunnels,
underpasses, or parking

.

In emergency situations, OnStar
can use the last stored GPS
location to send to emergency
responders.
A temporary loss of GPS can
cause loss of the ability to send
a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.
The Advisor may give a verbal
route or may ask for a call back
after the vehicle is driven into an
open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas
Avoid placing items over or near the
antenna to prevent blocking cellular
and GPS signal reception. Cellular
reception is required for OnStar to
send remote signals to the vehicle.

14-7

Unable to Connect to OnStar
Message
If there is limited cellular coverage
or the cellular network has reached
maximum capacity, this message
may come on. Push | to try the
call again or try again after driving a
few miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues
OnStar services require a vehicle
electrical system, wireless service,
and GPS satellite technologies to be
available and operating for features
to function properly. These systems
may not operate if the battery is
discharged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment
The OnStar system is integrated
into the electrical architecture of the
vehicle. Do not add any electrical
equipment. See Add-On Electrical
Equipment on page 9‑37. Added
electrical equipment may interfere
with the operation of the OnStar
system and cause it to not operate.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

14-8

Black plate (8,1)

OnStar

Privacy
The complete OnStar Privacy
Statement may be found at
www.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitive
users of wireless communications
are cautioned that the privacy of any
information sent via wireless cellular
communications cannot be assured.
Third parties may unlawfully
intercept or access transmissions
and private communications without
consent.

OnStar - libcurl and unzip
acknowledgments
Certain OnStar components include
libcurl and unzip software. Below
are the notices and licenses
associated with this software:
libcurl:
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION
NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel
Stenberg, .
All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,
and distribute this software for any
purpose with or without fee is
hereby granted, provided that the
above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all
copies.

Except as contained in this notice,
the name of a copyright holder shall
not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use
or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.

unzip:
This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the
Info-ZIP copyright and license. The
definitive version of this document
should be available at ftp://
ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/
license.html indefinitely.
Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All
rights reserved.
For the purposes of this copyright
and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as
the following set of individuals:
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,
Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,
Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed
Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris
Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,
Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (9,1)

OnStar
Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,
Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,
Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,
George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai
Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,
Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,
Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,
Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,
Rich Wales, Mike White
This software is provided “as is,”
without warranty of any kind,
express or implied. In no event shall
Info-ZIP or its contributors be held
liable for any direct, indirect,
incidental, special or consequential
damages arising out of the use of or
inability to use this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to
use this software for any purpose,
including commercial applications,
and to alter it and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following
restrictions:
1. Redistributions of source code
must retain the above copyright
notice, definition, disclaimer, and
this list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form
(compiled executables) must
reproduce the above copyright
notice, definition, disclaimer, and
this list of conditions in
documentation and/or other
materials provided with the
distribution. The sole exception
to this condition is redistribution
of a standard UnZipSFX binary
(including SFXWiz) as part of a
self-extracting archive; that is
permitted without inclusion of
this license, as long as the
normal SFX banner has not
been removed from the binary or
disabled.
3. Altered versions–including, but
not limited to, ports to new
operating systems, existing ports
with new graphical interfaces,
and dynamic, shared, or static
library versions–must be plainly
marked as such and must not be
misrepresented as being the
original source. Such altered
versions also must not be
misrepresented as being

14-9

Info-ZIP releases–including, but
not limited to, labeling of the
altered versions with the names
“Info-ZIP” (or any variation
thereof, including, but not limited
to, different capitalizations),
“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
“MacZip” without the explicit
permission of Info-ZIP. Such
altered versions are further
prohibited from
misrepresentative use of the
Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
addresses or of the
Info-ZIP URL(s).
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
and “MacZip” for its own source
and binary releases.

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

14-10

Black plate (10,1)

OnStar

2 NOTES

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (1,1)

INDEX

A
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Additional Information
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-11
Air Filter, Passenger
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
What Will You See after an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-19

Airbags
Adding Equipment to the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-10
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Servicing Airbag-Equipped
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Alarm
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Antenna
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Armrest
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Assistance Program,
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Audio System
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

i-1

Automatic
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Auxiliary
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16

B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-22
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20, 7-21
Brake
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-14
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

i-2

Black plate (2,1)

INDEX

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25, 6-3
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal, and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-26
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Stoplamps, and
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

C
California
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Cargo
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cautions, Danger, and
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Central Locking System . . . . . . . . 2-5
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-11
Check
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Ignition
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-22
Child Restraints
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-37
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45, 3-48
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9
Compressor Kit, Tire
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Connections
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Engine Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Cover
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (3,1)

INDEX
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
Customer Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . .13-11
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Devices
Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Diagnostics
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Door
Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Central Locking System . . . . . . . 2-5
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Driving
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-16
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-6
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

i-3

E
Electrical Equipment,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Electrical System
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Emergency
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Check and Service Engine
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

i-4

Black plate (4,1)

INDEX

Engine (cont'd)
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-19
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-21
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-1

F
Filter,
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-10
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . 10-25, 6-3
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Front Fog Lamp
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Front Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Front Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-33
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-19
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Requirements, California . . . . .9-33
Fuses
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

G
Gasoline
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Gauges
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Warning Lights and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
General Information
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

H
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (5,1)

INDEX
Headlamps
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . .5-20
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-19
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-20
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Heater
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-6
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Hooks
Shopping Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

i-5

I

L

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Indicator
Owner Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Infants and Young Children,
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-36
Lamps
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal, and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . 5-11
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
LATCH System
Replacing Parts after a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Liftgate
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Lighting
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

K
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

i-6

Black plate (6,1)

INDEX

Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-14
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-17
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-19
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-14
StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Lights (cont'd)
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-16
Link
Smartphone . . . . . . 7-29, 7-31, 7-33
Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Central Locking System . . . . . . . 2-5
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-19
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

M
Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-11
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Messages
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Mirrors
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Monitor System, Tire
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34, 7-39, 7-40
Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

N
Navigation
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Net
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (7,1)

INDEX

O
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-9
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-30
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
OnStar®
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
OnStar® Additional
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Operation, Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Ordering
Service Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11

Outlets
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Overview, Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Owner Manual Indicator . . . . . . . 5-14

P
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-22
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-20
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-24
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Personalization
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

i-7

Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20, 7-21
Hands-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
Pictures and
Movies . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34, 7-39, 7-40
Port
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Power
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-19
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-17
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Power Steering Warning
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Privacy
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7
Proposition 65 Warning,
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

i-8

Black plate (8,1)

INDEX

R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Radios
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-3
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Recommended
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Records
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Reduced Engine Power
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Reimbursement Program,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-29
Replacing LATCH System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-17
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Restraints
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Roads
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

S
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-17
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-15
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Seats
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (9,1)

INDEX
Securing Child
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45, 3-48
Security
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Service
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15
Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Publications Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7
Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Shift Lock Control Function
Check, Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Shifting
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Shopping Bag Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Smartphone
Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29, 7-31, 7-33
Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
StabiliTrak
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-16
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Storage Areas
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

i-9

Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
System
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Taillamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . 2-9
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Tires
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-43
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-42
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

i-10

Black plate (10,1)

INDEX

Tires (cont'd)
Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Sealant and Compressor
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-52
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Towing
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-66
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Traction
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-27
Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Transportation Program,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Turn Signal
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

U
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

V
Vehicle
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Vehicle (cont'd)
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Vehicle Care
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-62
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

W
Warning
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

Black plate (11,1)

INDEX
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-36
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Winter
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-22
Wipers
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

i-11

Chevrolet Spark Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 5/2/12

i-12

Black plate (12,1)

INDEX

2 NOTES



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.5-c012 1.149602, 2012/10/10-18:10:24
Format                          : application/pdf
Subject                         : null
Modified                        : 2014:11:06 14:16:52.644-05:00
Title                           : Owner's Manual
Size                            : 5127063
Extracted                       : 2014:11:03 11:14:38.467-05:00
Sha 1                           : 9d58454e376f0720d047f6534ff7e3f8e2eb5745
Modify Date                     : 2012:06:01 07:20:55-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2012:06:01 07:20:55-04:00
Create Date                     : 2012:05:02 13:58:27-04:00
Creator Tool                    : Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.550/W Unicode
Producer                        : Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.550/W Unicode
Tags                            : OwnerCenter:GMNA/asset_type/owner_manual, OwnerCenter:GMNA/2013/chevrolet/spark
Instance ID                     : uuid:2026ecb8-bbd2-4bb0-8d4e-d968693efb3a
Document ID                     : uuid:a82d0bef-f314-4a09-b700-9f86e871d128
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 356
Creator                         : Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.550/W Unicode
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu